Chrysler | 2004 Town and Country | Owner`s manual | Chrysler 2004 Town and Country Owner`s manual

2014 Town & Country
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14Y531-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Town & Country
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features
and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features
and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered
on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use
public transportation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself
to install them on products previously manufactured.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears stamped on
the right sliding door sill under the sill moulding and
printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label
affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate. . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .18
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Sound Horn With Remote Lock . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .32
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door —
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . .
▫ Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .29
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
. . . . . . . . . .37
. . . . . . . . . .37
. . . . . . . . . .39
. . . . . . . . . .41
. . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . .46
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 SLIDING SIDE DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . .52
▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock . . . . . .56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .73
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .88
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 䡵 COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES (NO FACTORY
INSTALLED REAR SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED . . .121
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .76
▫ Restraining Infants And Small Children In
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
Commercial Cargo Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .123
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .81
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition system.
This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node
(WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert the
Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
2
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature If Equipped
This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Enter-NGo™ feature, refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And
Operating for further information.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent 1 — OFF
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START 2 — ACCESSORY
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. 3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the Key Fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
Emergency Key Removal
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and into the lock cylinder with either side up.
then pull the key out with your other hand.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
WARNING! (Continued)
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push
ignition button to place ignition in OFF position.
When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
position.
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
opening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch
is placed in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause
the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Replacement Keys
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
CAUTION!
as possible by an authorized dealer.
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
General Information
Customer Key Programming
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
authorized dealer.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
performed at an authorized dealer.
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm To Arm The System
provides both audible and visible signals, for the first Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
three minutes, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light 1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For an
further information).
additional 15-minutes, only the headlights, park lamps
and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
Rearming Of The System
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NThe Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that
vehicle:
condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP butfurther information).
ton (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the
vehicle).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
•
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N(RKE) transmitter.
Go™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
3. If any doors are open, close them.
turn the key to the ON position.
To Disarm The System
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
the following methods:
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
door the alarm will sound.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior Tamper Alert
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Security System Manual Override
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, doors using the manual door lock plunger.
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this doors or open any door.
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition EQUIPPED
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
NOTE:
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour- door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The
the “Dome ON” position (rotate horizontal thumb RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
wheel on the bottom of the switch to the far right vehicle to activate the system.
detent position).
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the the ignition switch disables the system from responding
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
the far left detent position).
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Using The RKE Transmitter
Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UNLOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions.
Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter
Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be
equipped from the factory with three-button RKE transKey Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter
mitters, and those built with power options will be
Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions
equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.
that allow the same basic operation as the three-button,
but may also be used to operate the power liftgate
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(optional), power sliding doors, Remote Start feature
(optional). Some features can be programmed to the
customers preferences. For example, flash headlights or
sound horn on LOCK.
Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to
unlock all doors and liftgate. This will also turn on the
Illuminated Entry system.
Remote Key Unlock On First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side, or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE:
Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter
• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitUnlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform- ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
ing the following steps:
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
vehicle.
Security Alarm.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
Sound Horn With Remote Lock
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
button while still holding the LOCK button.
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
proceed as follows:
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elecing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transtronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Unthe Key Fob removed.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
mation.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitfollowing steps:
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
vehicle.
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans- Alarm.
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10
Using The Panic Alarm
seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
holding the LOCK button.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
removed.
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).
its previous setting.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.
• When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the
The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
PANIC button a second time, you may have to move
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF) If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, using RKE transmitter to open the power liftgate
noises of the system.
does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle Security
• The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is Alarm.
running.
Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — If
Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Equipped
Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate. If RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position. RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
NOTE:
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead position.
console.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, pressing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Vehicle Security Alarm.
Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock — If
Equipped
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “ElecRKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnRKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforpower-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
mation.
position.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is
following steps:
armed, pressing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Ve- 1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
hicle Security Alarm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed Programming Additional Transmitters
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK contact your authorized dealer for details.
button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- battery.
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and NOTE:
the Key Fob removed.
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
•
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle 1.
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
Remove Screw From Transmitter Case
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Separating Transmitter Case
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal NOTE:
distance, check for these two conditions:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
How To Use Remote Start
radios.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
engine will Remote Start:
• Shift lever in PARK
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Doors closed
niently from outside the vehicle while still • Hood closed
maintaining security. The system has a range of
• Liftgate closed
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned • For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
to the ON/RUN position.
in the Remote Start mode.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
• The engine can be started times (two 15 minutes
cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the igniPress and release the REMOTE START button
tion switch must be cycled by pushing the START/
on the RKE transmitter twice within five secSTOP button twice (or the ignition switch must be
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
cycled to the ON/RUN position).
lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle To Enter The Vehicle After Remote Start
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
cycle.
Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. After the
NOTE:
vehicle is unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, press and
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
release the START/STOP button (or insert the Key Fob
will automatically lock the doors.
into the ignition switch and move it to the ON/RUN
• The park lights will turn on and remain on during position), otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of
15-minute cycle.
Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-NGo™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if • For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-Nequipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
Go™ feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Key
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
To Run” will display in the EVIC until you insert and
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
turn the key to ON/RUN position. Refer to “Electronic
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for further inforON/RUN position.
mation.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
the START/STOP button.
Turn to ON” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the
Key Fob. Once inserted, the message “Remote Start
Active - Key To Run⬙ will display in the EVIC until you
insert and turn the key to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Cancel Remote Start
To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
occur:
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the
• Any engine warning lights come on
Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote
Start button to shut down the engine for two seconds
• Fuel lamp turns on
after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
• The hood is opened
When To Reset Remote Start
• The hazard switch is pressed
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was
• The brake pedal is pressed
initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start• The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute ing. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle
cycle
Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC
button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset by cycling
the START/STOP button to the ON/RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs
on each door trim panel.
2
If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door,
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock
If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side
sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Sliding Door Lock
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing
the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the Key Fob.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into
the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors
closed).
If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the power
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
door locks (lock or unlock).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Ve- NOTE:
hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable FeaYour Instrument Panel” for further information.
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph
(24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit
• If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for an
features in accordance with local laws.
extended period of time, the Passive Entry feature for
the handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
door handle will reactivate the door handle’s Passive
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
Entry feature.
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower repress the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
sponse time.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you unlock the doors using the Passive Entry door
handles, but do NOT pull the handle, the doors will
automatically lock after 60 seconds.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
present in the ignition.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outNOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
NOTE: All doors will remain locked when the liftgate
release handle is pressed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
four doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows using
switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. The
The Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver’s
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acceswindows from the driver’s seat.
sory delay.
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close
Driver’s Power Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
2
Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
depressing the bar switch just below the power window
switches.
Power Window Lockout Switch
Front Passenger Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and a set of switches that lock and unlock all doors. The
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acces- The front window switches may be equipped with an
sory delay.
Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
The power window switches remain active for up to 10
minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting) after
the ignition switch has been turned to OFF. Opening a
vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
The front driver and front passenger switches may be
first detent and hold to close window manually.
equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window
switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the
WARNING!
window will go up automatically.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
NOTE:
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
steps after vehicle power is restored:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
switch again to close the window.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single switch on the door handle
assembly.
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has stopping several inches above the window sill.
activated the Power Window Lockout.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Wind Buffeting
To keep your door operating properly, observe the following guidelines:
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the • Always open the door smoothly.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the • Avoid high impacts against the door stop when openwindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occuris parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
rence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are
the downhill direction.
open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the • There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunsliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
exterior handle.
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by anytime the vehicle is in motion.
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backwards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
hold open latch in order to close the door.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five
seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds
a second time will close the door.
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console
for the driver and passengers. Pressing the switch once
will open the power sliding door. If the switch is pressed
while the door is under a power cycle, the door will
reverse direction.
The power sliding door may be opened or
closed manually or by using the buttons on the
RKE transmitter, overhead console switch, or
rear door switch. Pulling the inside or outside
power sliding door handle will also power open or close
the power sliding door.
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked
before the power sliding door switches will operate.
NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a
second time while the sliding door is power opening or
power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or
closed manually.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door
master lock button, located in the overhead console, to
disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passengers.
NOTE:
Power Sliding Door Switch
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding door if the shift lever is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the
power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and
vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be
pressed.
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
door feature will be canceled and will go into manual
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
mode.
meets sufficient resistance.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it
is fully open and then press the switch again.
Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash
The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12
seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will
alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc- entering or exiting the vehicle.
tions within the same cycle, the system will automati- The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or
cally stop, the power sliding door motor will make a disabled by performing the following procedure:
clicking sound until the door has no further movement. This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling 1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
the inside or outside handle. If this condition occurs, 2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/RUN to OFF five
no damage is done to the power sliding door motor.
times ending in the ON/RUN position (do not start
The power sliding door must be opened or closed
the engine).
manually.
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZARD switch ON.
WARNING!
You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
before closing the door.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the
previous procedure.
Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch
2
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
and handles may be overridden by pressing the OFF side
of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front
overhead console.
When the power sliding door master lock switch is in the
OFF position, the power sliding side door may not be
opened or closed by pressing the switch located on the
Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch
B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or
1 — Left Sliding Door
3 — Right Sliding Door
activating the inside power sliding door handle.
2 — Liftgate
4 — Master Lock
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
Child Protection Door Lock
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection
Door Lock.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always
test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the
desired position.
• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position) the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches
on the overhead console or the switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door.
• The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front
of the power sliding door, regardless of the Child
Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding door from
the rear seats, press the “OFF” Master Lock Out
Switch located in the front overhead console, next to
the driver.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened
from the outside door handle or the switches located
on the B-Pillar trim panel just in front of the power
sliding door when the Child Protection Door Locks
are engaged.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
• The power sliding door will operate from the outside
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Prodoor handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the
tection Door Lock.
overhead console, or the switches located on the
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if
B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding
equipped).
door when the shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the
child lock lever position.
NOTE:
• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system, LIFTGATE
always test the door from the inside to make certain it On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
is in the desired position.
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
To open the liftgate, press the liftgate release handle Power Liftgate — If Equipped
located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds,
a second time, will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pressing the button located on the overhead console.
Liftgate Handle Location
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button,
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
Overhead Console Master Power Switch
1 — Left Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Master Lock
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the • There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
and several audible beeps will occur to signal that the
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
liftgate is opening or closing.
position.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• During power operation, whether liftgate is fully open
or fully closed, the liftgate chime will beep several
times indicating power operation is in progress.
• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must
be opened or closed manually.
•
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•
If the liftgate release button is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift
lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −12°F (−24°C) or temperatures above 143°F
(62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate buttons.
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperastop and must be opened or closed manually.
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
(Continued)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
which lock the seat belt webbing into position by
extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting
the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or
secure a large item in a seat
Please pay close attention to the information in this
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
that span the front, second, and third row seating for
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
the driver and passengers seated next to a window
possible.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
wheel
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may CHildren (LATCH).
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
energy during an impact event
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and third row rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
center) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), severity and type of collision.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
buckled up in a rear seat.
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
WARNING!
(Refer to “Child Restraints”).
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
facing infant seat.
shoulder belts properly.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
vehicle with a rear seat.
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
(Continued)
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder
belts.
The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the
far away from home or on your own street.
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out Belt And Latch Plate
WARNING!
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
Removing Slack From Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi- The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat.
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of
the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt
is long enough to fit , insert the large latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a “click.” The retractor should
withdraw any slack in the belt.
To release the small latch plate, position the end of the
large latch plate against the red button on the small latch
plate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into the
headliner.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the
shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck. The
upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by pushing
anywhere on the anchorage. To move the anchorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons while simultaneously
pushing down on the anchorage assembly.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or
a cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child
restraint system. For additional information refer to
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
under the “Child Restraint” section. The chart below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second Row
Bench Seating
Third Row
ALR
First Row
Second Row
Quad Seating
Third Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
Center
N/A
N/A
Passenger
ALR
ALR
ALR
Cinch
ALR
Second Row Captains Chairs
Second Row Bench Seat
Driver
N/A
ALR
Second Row Quad Seating
Center
N/A
ALR
Cinch
Passenger
ALR
N/A
ALR
First Row
Second Row
SnG Seating
Third Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
Center
N/A
N/A
Passenger
ALR
ALR
ALR
Cinch
ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly reALR and is being used for normal usage:
strained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortthe entire belt is extracted.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Equipped
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically preUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is availMode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combinalocking mode.
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
Energy Management Feature
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occuManagement feature in the front seating positions to help pants, including those in child restraints.
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
collision.
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
These head restraints are passive, deployable compoThis system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
identified by any markings, only through visual inspeccertain types of rear impacts.
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severThe Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines ity and type of the impact.
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
AHR In Reset Position
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
NOTE:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
into the back decorative plastic half.
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authoOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. deactivating BeltAlert®.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuwhile the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when
the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low
and snug and in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the extender when not needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
the force if there is a collision.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
Seat Belt Extender
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
long enough. When it is not required, remove the exDriver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
tender and store it.
panel below the steering column.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag/Knee
Bolster
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC • Air Bag Warning Light
air bags are located above the side windows and their
• Steering Wheel and Column
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
• Instrument Panel
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
• Knee Impact Bolsters
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an •
authorized dealer immediately.
•
Air Bag System Components
•
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats only.
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB air bags during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
SAB air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downsystem. Occupants, including children who are up
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
against or very close to SAB air bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should NOTE:
not lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
area where the SAB air bags inflate, even if they are in an
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
infant or child restraint.
vehicle may deploy.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
but they will open during air bag deployment.
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
• Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their
body outside of the window.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the protection for the driver and front passenger.
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
child.
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides required for this vehicle.
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
bags, SABs, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and Side Knee Air Bag may deploy in crashes with little
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
several factors, including the severity and type of impact. initial deceleration.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
collisions depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
are and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Adment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover
separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to
inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about
15 to 20 milliseconds.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
collision.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
Unit
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
triggered, releasing a large quantity of non-toxic gas. The
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully
Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A
inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items
are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates.
This especially applies to children.
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
Front And Side Impact Sensors
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
events.
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 Enhanced Accident Response System
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you the communication network remains intact, and the
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
event the ORC will determine whether to have the If A Deployment Occurs
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
ing functions:
immediately after deployment.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
the battery has power or until the ignition key is or all of the following may occur:
removed.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
• Unlock the doors automatically.
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defew days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check
the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on
the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag
fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
the air bag system immediately.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems perfirst turned to the ON/RUN position.
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
eight second interval.
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or is designed to record such data as:
remains on while driving.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
were buckled/fastened;
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipaccelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children. Every state in the
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by United States, and every Canadian province, requires
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
crash investigation.
the rear seats rather than in the front.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:
There are different sizes and types of restraints for • http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are
still less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
the vehicle seat?
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
way back?
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Second Row Bench
Second Row Captains Chairs
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint LATCH Positions
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No
N/A
Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the child
and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use
the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of
the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Second row outboard positions only,
third row all positions.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchors located behind each rear seatback, near to the floor.
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages
Shown)
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH – Commercial Cargo Vehicles
(No Factory Installed Rear Seats) — If Equipped
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Always follow the directions of the child restraint 3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
here.
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autochild seat. You may also move the front seat forward
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
to allow more room for the car seat.
belt following the instructions below. See the section
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatBelt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
ing position.
position has.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
tions to attach a tether anchor.
anchorages.
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
them.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with- retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description unattaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
der “Occupant Restraints”. The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
Belt
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the following
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are table(s) and the following sections for more information
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking about both types of seat belts.
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
WARNING! (Continued)
2
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
Second Row Bench
Second Row Captains Chair
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the Tether Anchor with the
seat belt to attach a forward facing
child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward
facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed,
if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Second row outboard positions only,
third row all positions.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be
twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not
twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
2
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the car seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click”.
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the car seat.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
path.
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
“click”.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
vehicle seat.
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
2
118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
anchor.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconchild restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
is available.
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
2
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting (Second Row
Anchorage Shown)
120 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 121
COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES (NO FACTORY
INSTALLED REAR SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a
family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a
child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight.
2
WARNING!
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger Air Bag. In a collision, a passenger Air Bag
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints.
Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor
This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether
anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger
seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forwardfacing child restraints equipped with an upper tether
strap.
122 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Restraining Infants And Small Children In
Commercial Cargo Vehicles
NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is
centered between the headrest supports underneath the
head rest.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large 3. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the
correct for your child. Refer to “Child Restraints” in the
metal anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger
“Occupant Restraints” section.
seat.
Tether Installation For Commercial Cargo Vehicles
4. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tighten the child restraint tether strap.
To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the
vehicle, follow these steps:
1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower
rear of the front passenger seat.
2. Route the tether strap under the head rest.
WARNING!
The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with
a child restraint only. It should not be used for any
other purpose.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 123
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vedrivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
hicle”.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
CAUTION!
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the in the engine or damage may result.
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
mental and should be avoided.
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
2
124 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
WARNING! (Continued)
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 125
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is or retractor condition, replace the belt.
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
2
126 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
128 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .136
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .137
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .140
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .141
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
䡵 Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . .195
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . .196
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .182
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Stow ’n Go® Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . .201
▫ Quad Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .212
▫ Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped. . . . .213
▫ Third Row Power Folding Seat —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks. . . . . . . . .220
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .220
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory
Seat ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .224
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .227
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . .227
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .228
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . .233
▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS . . . . . .235
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .237
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .239
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .240
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .241
▫ Enabling/Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . . . . .253
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .254
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — Without
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .259
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Front Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) . . . . . . .261 䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .274
▫ Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped . . . . .263
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .264
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .266
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .270
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . . .288
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . .282
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Second Row Floor Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped. . .285
▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . .287
▫ Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .304
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Deploying The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 䡵 SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .310
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .304
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
3
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) Equipped
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
WARNING!
mirror adjusts.
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging three detent positions:
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
• Full forward position
mirror.
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThe power mirror controls are located on the driver-side tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
door trim panel.
mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions
can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat
Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Controls
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’s
outside mirror will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt
Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
will automatically unfold.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
following occurs:
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pressing the button. (This may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Illuminated Mirror
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
NOTE:
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the deany forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
tection zones.
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake
is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the
vehicle is stationary.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sensor Locations
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
3
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
Modes Of Operation With EVIC
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
be reduced.
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when NOTE:
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
system, the radio volume is reduced.
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the radio volume is reduced.
the appropriate visual alert only.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
Blind Spot Alert Off
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”,
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
supported phones.
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating For Uconnect® customer support:
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle • U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
1-877-855-8400.
used.
• Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com
or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED
(French).
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect® Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice Com(Uconnect® Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Voice Command Button
Operation
Actual button location may vary with the ra- Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
dio. The individual buttons are described in the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
“Operation” section.
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
details.
prompt.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device,” the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth Device.”
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
To complete the pairing process, you will need to referthe beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being the
pairing instructions:
highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones
button to begin.
1. Press the
to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any given time,
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your
“Device Pairing.”
Uconnect® System. The priority allows the Uconnect®
Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple
3. When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For
and follow the audible prompts.
example, if priority three and priority five phones are
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifica- present in the vehicle, the Uconnect® Phone will use the
tion Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You
into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any
PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this
section).
initial pairing process.
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give Dial By Saying A Number
the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile phone.
button to begin.
• Press the
Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
unique phone name.
“Dial.”
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “234–567–8901.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Press the
button to begin.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect® Phonebook.”
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
“Call.”
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
person you want to call.
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previby Saying a Name” section.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook
to the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
button to begin.
• Press the
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry.”
able for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomphone is accessible.
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
instead of “Bob.”
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonewhen the vehicle is not in motion. Automatic downbook entry, if desired.
loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
button to begin.
• Press the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone“Phonebook Edit.”
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
main menu.
entry that you wish to edit.
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
phonebook entry that you are editing.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
to the main menu.
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
number to a name entry that already exists in the
from the list, press the
button while the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and say
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
“Delete.”
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit”
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
feature.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
button to begin.
• Press the
language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete.”
deleted or edited.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook
• Press the
• Press the
button to begin.
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All.”
“Phonebook List Names.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you • The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
butdeleted.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
ton during the playing of the desired name, and say
NOTE:
“Call.”
• Only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be operations at this point.
deleted or edited.
• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
The following features can be accessed through the Currently In Progress
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your If a call is currently in progress and you have another
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Phone Call Features
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
button to accept the call. To reject the Progress
call. Press the
button until you hear a single
call, press and hold the
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling Conference Call
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
to “Conference Call” in this section.
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
joined into one conference call.
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To Three-Way Calling
but- To initiate three-way calling, press the
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button while
ton until you hear a single beep.
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.” After the second call has established,
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
press the
button until you hear a single beep, indicatbeep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
one conference call.
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Toggling Between Calls
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Call Termination
Call Continuation
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
Redial
• Press the
button to begin.
1. After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say 2. After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after
“Redial.”
which the call is automatically transferred from the
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
was dialed from your mobile phone.
3. An active call is automatically transferred to the
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
Uconnect® Phone.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
Language Selection
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
using:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
button to begin.
• Press the
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
button to begin.
• Press the
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
language selection.
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
voice commands will be in that language.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect® Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect® System,
• and have network coverage.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and say Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
If you need roadside assistance:
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your • Press the
button to begin.
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
for the mobile phone directly.
“Towing Assistance.”
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assistance phone number using the Voice Command system.
To do this, press the button and say “Setup,” followed by
“Towing Assistance.” When prompted say 1-800-5212779 for U.S./Canada, say 55-14-3454 for Mexico City
and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
Paging
or automated customer service line. Some services reTo learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
Voice Mail Calling
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
followed
by the word “Send.” For example, if required to
with Automated Systems”.
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send.”
can press the
Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
“Send,” is also to be used for navigating through an Barge In — Overriding Prompts
automated customer service center menu structure, and The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
to leave a number on a pager.
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to could press the
select
that
option
without
having to listen to the rest of
call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and the voice prompt.
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
tones over the phone.
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE:
• Press the
button to begin.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
network configurations. This is normal.
one of the following:
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone And Network Status Indicators
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone:
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By • Press the
button.
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
• Following the beep, say “Mute.”
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
• Press the
To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Press the
button.
button to begin.
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the • When prompted, say “List Phones.”
button • The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the
and say “Transfer Call.”
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
button and say “Sebeing announced, press the
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
lect” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for an
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone.
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Select Another Mobile Phone
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
This feature allows you to select and start using another • Press the
button to begin.
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button to begin.
• Press the
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
prompts.
button at any time while the • You can also press the
• You can also press the
button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
list is being played, and choose the phone you wish to
you wish to select.
delete.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft. [9 m]) the vehicle.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogrunning, all windows closed, and the blower fan
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
switched off.
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce- This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
dures:
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Voice Training
From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from Reset
radio mode):
• Press the
button.
button for five seconds until
• Press and hold the
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
the session begins, or,
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
button and say the “Voice Training,”
• Press the
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
“System Training,” or “Start Voice Training” comand other settings in all language modes. The System will
mand.
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command
• Fully closed windows
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to • Dry weather condition
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would • When navigating through an automated system such
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
you.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
during a Voice Command period.
not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must •
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
•
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
•
• Even though international dialing for most number
•
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect® Phone.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
compromised with the convertible top down.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
Audio quality is maximized under:
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Recent Calls
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download,” Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Text Reply
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Send Messages:
Read Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will 1. Press the
button.
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
If you wish to hear the new message:
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
button.
1. Press the
3. You can either say the message you wish to send or
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
say “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
button while the
To send a message, press the
3. Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for system is listing the message and say “Send.” Uconnect®
you.
Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the
person you wish to send the message to.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
List of Preset Messages:
11. See You in 15 minutes.
1. Yes.
12. I am on my way.
2. No.
13. I’ll be late.
3. Where are you?
14. Are you there yet?
4. I need more direction.
15. Where are we meeting?
5. L O L.
16. Can this wait?
6. Why?
17. Bye for now.
7. I love you.
18. When can we meet?
8. Call me.
19. Send number to call.
9. Call me later.
20. Start without me.
10. Thanks.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement
ON/OFF
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Turning the Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
OFF will stop the system from announcing the new can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
incoming messages.
Bluetooth® ON mode.
button.
• Press the
Power-Up
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, Incoming Message Announcement,” you will After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
then be given a choice to change it.
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
pairing
phonebook
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of
the party responsible for compliance could void the
devices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device,
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
• This device must accept any interference received,
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
eration.
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
button, you menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a the active application.
command.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few a normal speaking volume.
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
The system will best recognize your speech if the winoptions.
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists set to low.
button, listen for
options, press the Voice Command
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
the beep, and say your command.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- Main Menu
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
mand
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the
Commands
main menu.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands. In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Universal commands are available at all times. Local com• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
mands are available if the supported radio mode is active.
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
Changing The Volume
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the • “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice ComStreaming mode)
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Radio AM
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
mands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Disc Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
may say the following commands:
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo Mode
USB Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
this mode, you may say the following commands:
may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
one of the following commands:
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
– “Save” (to save the memo)
Name, Track Name, etc.)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Switch to system setup”
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Main menu setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — • “Switch to setup”
During the playback you may press the Voice Com- In this mode, you may say the following commands:
button to stop playing memos. You promand
• “Language English”
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Language French”
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Language Spanish”
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
• “Tutorial”
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Voice Training”
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
• “Change to setup”
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
SEATS
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect® vehicle.
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
3
Driver Power Seat Switch
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Heated Seats — If Equipped
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On some models, the front and rear seats may be On models that are equipped with remote start, the
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions.
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
WARNING!
Vehicle” for further information.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, Front Heated Seats
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
tion or other physical condition must exercise care and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
controls for each heater are located on the switch bank
even at low temperatures, especially if used for below the climate controls.
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Rear Heated Seats
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
second row passengers to operate the seats indepenPress the switch once to select HIGH-level dently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding
heating. Press the switch a second time to select side door handle trim panels.
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,
indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,
indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Manual Seat Adjuster
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you For models equipped with manual reclining seats, the
have reached the desired position. Then, using body recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
Head Restraints
identified by any markings, only through visual inspecHead restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Push Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
3
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Head Restraints — Third Row
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Stow ’n Go® Seating — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go® seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
Second Row Stow ’n Go®
Push Button
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go® seats, the seats
will fold and tumble in one motion.
If your vehicle is equipped with a second row bench seat, 1. Move the front seat fully forward.
the head restraints are not adjustable.
2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.
3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the 5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on
armrests are raised.
the outboard side of the seat.
4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the
“LOCK” position and then pull up on the storage bin
latch to open the cover.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold
automatically during the seat tumble. No additional
actuation is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
3
Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
Automatic Folding Seatback
The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy
storage.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tumbled Second Row Seat
6. Push the seat into the storage bin.
Seat In Storage Bin
7. Close the storage bin cover.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
To Unstow Second Row Seats
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.
2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat
anchors.
3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.
4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, close
the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking
mechanism to the “Unlocked” position.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
(Continued)
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Stow ’n Go® Seat — Folded And Latched Position
To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched
position: return the seatback and head restraint to the
upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner
Raising The Seatback
lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest
and seatback and tumble seat forward.
2. Return the head restraint to the upright position.
1. Return the seatback to the upright position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Easy Entry Second Row
The second row Stow ’n Go® seats allow easy entry to the
third row seat or rear cargo area.
Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat.
Raising The Head Restraint
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and
tumble seat forward.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The seat will automatically fold into position for easy
entry into the third row.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
Quad Seats — If Equipped
Both Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
3
Manual Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Flat
Easy Entry
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the third row. With the Quad seat in the fold-flat position,
the seat cushion.
lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of
the seat and lift the seat forward.
Fold-Flat Quad Seat
Easy Entry Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull
strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the
bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on
the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the
seatback and accessing the easy entry lever.
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
Removal
The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage is
needed. With the seat in the easy entry position, lift the
cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor
latches.
Cross Beam For Seat Removal
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is
moved on its Easy Out® Rollers.
removable for added cargo space.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
Second Row Bench Seat
Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near
the floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle
and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock
Release Handles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions
on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate upward
until the lock indicator button returns into the handle.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the bench seats could become
loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstalling these seats, be sure the red indicator button on
the release handles return into the handles.
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
Third Row Power Seat Switch
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped
for occupant comfort.
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Lower the head restraint by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of
the head restraint.
One Touch Folding Seat Third Row
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
and the vehicle is in PARK.
the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
NOTE:
• Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small
buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting
to fold/stow the power third row seats.
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
can be selected.
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open To Normal
2 — Stow
3 — Tailgate/Fold Flat
4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
• The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection for safe operation. When the system detects
an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
motion a short distance to move the seat away from
the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle
and press the button again, for the desired position.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback
by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the
head restraint down.
2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side
of the head restraint.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
3. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the rear of the 4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors.
seat to lower the seatback.
3
Release Strap “3”
Release Strap “2”
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
Stowed Third Row Seat
Release Strap “4”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
To Unfold Third Row Seats
WARNING! (Continued)
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the
anchors latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the recliner.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
Tailgate Mode
4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
(Continued)
1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release strap “4” to
rotate the entire seat rearward.
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, outside
mirrors, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals, and
radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to recall the
Driver Memory Switch
same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE
transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to
each of the memory positions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory
6. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
driver’s door.
NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered 7. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settings
button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must
for that button and store a new one.
be performed within five seconds if you desire to also
use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
8. Select “Remote Linked to Memory” in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideRefer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
view mirror to the desired positions.
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Un3. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforpositions.
mation.
4. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up 9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
transmitters.
to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and 10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
remove the key.
the ON position.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
11. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, and
position using the other numbered Memory button or the pedals stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
to link another RKE transmitter to memory.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: Pressing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the
memory mirror recall.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not To Disable RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
remove the key.
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1. 2. Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system will
recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
for the system to complete the memory recall before
MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
continuing to Step 3.
button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position 2.
3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
on the driver’s door.
MEMORY buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S,
4. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either • When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearMemory Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE
ward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal
transmitter.
to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
will return to its previously set position when you
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
the LOCK position.
Customer-Programmable Features⬙ in “Understanding
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm)
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is
ONLY)
between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
position when you insert the key into the ignition
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
key from the ignition switch.
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit Position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled
or disabled through the programmable features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your
vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership
can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
safety catch lever downward while raising the hood at
panel, below the steering column.
the same time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 12 in (30 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Safety Lever Location
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
interior lights and the fog lights.
Headlight Switch With Halo Control
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise
position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the
headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,
turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (OFF)
position.
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE: The headlights on with wipers will only operate
if it is selected from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or from the Uconnect® System (if equipped).
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
or ⬙Uconnect® Settings” (if equipped) in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headThis feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interon when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the Lights-On Reminder
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled. If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
remain on. To change the timer setting, see your autho- the driver’s door is opened.
rized dealer.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condiFeatures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
further information.
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
will turn off in the normal manner.
off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push in the headlight switch control knob.
Pressing the headlight switch control knob in a second
time will turn the front fog lights off.
3
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer switch is located next to the headlight
switch.
Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this
second detent (extreme top position) to turn on the feature to operate.
interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the Interior Lighting Off
dimmer control is in this position.
Rotate the left dimmer control to the off position (extreme
Interior lights are also turned on when a door or liftgate bottom). The interior lights will remain off when the
is opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is doors or liftgate are open.
activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
extreme top.
Rotate the left dimmer control to the first detent. This
The interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi- feature brightens the odometer, radio and overhead
mately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds displays when the parking lights or headlights are on.
every activation thereafter until the engine is started, if
Halo Lights — If Equipped
one of the following occur:
Interior Lighting On
• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open
• Any overhead reading light is left on
Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help
to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in
locating specific features while driving at night.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
The Halo control switch is located to the right of the Multifunction Lever
dimmer switch.
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
3
Halo Control
To activate the Halo lights, rotate the Halo
switch control upward or downward to increase or decrease the lighting.
Multifunction Lever
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The multifunction lever controls the:
Turn Signal Warning
• Turn Signals
• Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn)
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to
alert the driver.
• Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions
Lane Change Assist
• Headlight Beams Low/High
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
three times then automatically turn off.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. High/Low Beam Switch
Turn Signals
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel will switch
from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the
neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam
operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
NOTE: Broken, muddy or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the windshield
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
or camera lens will cause the system to function impropremain on until the lever is released.
erly.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
To Activate
The Automatic High Beam system provides increased
forward lighting at night by automating high beam 1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
control through the use of a digital camera mounted on
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Unthe inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforspecific light and automatically switches from high
mation.
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
of view.
2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO (A) position.
Flash-To-Pass
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch 3. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
to the on position.
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to
“Multifunction Lever” in this section for further inforBattery Protection
mation.
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or
at, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h).
front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After
To Deactivate
eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
position and the headlight switch in any position other
Automatic High Beam system.
than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight
EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center switch.
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “UnThe battery protection feature will be disabled if the
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforignition switch is turned to any other position other than
mation.
LOCK during the eight minute delay.
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that preThe wipers and washers are operated by a switch within vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunc- off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.
to the wiper motor may occur.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Washer And Wiper Controls
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Windshield Washers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
To use the Washer, push on the end of the lever to the
second detent and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers
will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the
wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Mist Feature
Press the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward
the steering column) to the first detent and release for a
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past single wiping cycle.
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operawindshield. The wash function must be used in order to
tion.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Wiper Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Rear Wiper And Washer
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the
rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate
the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray
until the ring is released, and then resume the intermittent interval.
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
wiper speed only.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been
calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operator desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less
wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2
or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windfrom the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
shield.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
feature.
may reduce rain sensor performance.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off • Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmisVehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
sion shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and the
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandvehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or
the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the • Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
following conditions:
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or the
previously) exist.
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps bank below the climate controls. There are also soft-keys
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering in the radio screen that will activate the heated steering
wheel.
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
Press the switch to turn on the heated
approximately 30 to 80 minutes before automatically
steering wheel. The light on the switch
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
will illuminate to indicate the steering
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
warm.
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with the
steering wheel.
The switch is located on the left side of the steering
column.
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
Adjustable Pedal Switch
NOTE:
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
(toward the front of the vehicle).
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
WARNING!
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed You could lose control and have an accident. Always
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under- adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +
3 — SET 4 — CANCEL
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Set A Desired Speed
To Resume Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button. To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Decrease Speed
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
continue to increase until the button is released, then of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
the new set speed will be established.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h
moderate hills is normal.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
Control.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
WARNING!
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear 10 mph (16 km/h).
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. ParkSense® Sensors
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® SysThe four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
tem Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
recommendations.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 59 in
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientachanged to the ON/RUN position.
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the CustomerProgrammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
3
ParkSense® Warning Display
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Park Assist System OFF
Park Assist System ON
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
3
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the radio volume, if on, (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
when the system is sounding an audio tone.
further information.
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense®
When ParkSense® is disabled, the instrument cluster will
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled through the
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC.
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the rear fascia/bumper is free from snow, ice,
mud, dirt and debris, see your authorized dealer.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense® will not operate.
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could • Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument clusFailure to do so can result in the system not working
ter will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furproperly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
thermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
key.
bumper.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC will
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
(30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the radio volume
SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the EVIC.
when it is sounding a tone.
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
Plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/ distances for each zone:
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
the “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
5. Press the “save” soft-key.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. 2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console model featured fixed incandescent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass storage and conversation mirror. The premium front overhead console model features a LED focused light that
illuminates the instrument panel cupholders, two swiveling LED lights, flip-down sunglass storage, conversation mirror, optional power sliding door switches and an
optional power liftgate switch.
NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of
above except sunglass storage.
Overhead Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only)
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
From the closed position, press the door latch to open the
compartment.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows (LED lamps only).
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
illuminated from a light in the overhead console (premium console only). This light is turned on when the
headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when
the dimmer control is rotated up or down.
Over Door Latch
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Full Open Position
Conversation Mirror Position
From this position, the door can be fully closed or, by NOTE: From the “conversation mirror” position, the
rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing, door can only be closed.
positioned for conversation mirror use.
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to
release.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
3
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.
You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing
the outside ring, which is identified with four directional
Reading Lights
arrows.
Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped
The rear overhead storage system is available in two
versions: with or without sunroof.
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode,
for added convenience.
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Console Halo Lighting
The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/
Halo Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding the
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
Overhead Compartment Features
1 — DVD*
2 — Rear HVAC
3 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage
* If equipped, otherwise storage.
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Storage
DVD*
Interior Lights
Halo Lighting
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
3
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manuposition and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
indicator flashes.
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door follow these steps:
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
not release the button.
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
activates, programming is complete.
steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to Programming A Non-Rolling Code
complete the training.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, before 1995.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
erase the channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- follow these steps:
mitter button.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
not release the button.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programfrom slow to rapid.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
remaining steps.
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indiseveral seconds of transmission.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigfully trained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
door may open and close while you are programming.
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programdoor or gate motor.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
erase the channels.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for Using HomeLink®
programming, plug it back in at this time.
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operaTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lightfollow these steps:
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
also be used at any time.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until Security
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
not release the button.
in your vehicle.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all chanfollow all remaining steps.
nels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
WARNING!
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
WARNING!
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
WARNING! (Continued)
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
Opening Sunroof — Express
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatiPress the switch rearward and release it within one-half cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati- Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will the sunroof.
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
Sunshade Operation
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Venting Sunroof — Express
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurPress and release the Vent button within one half second rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Sunroof Maintenance
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on the
the glass panel.
lower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. The
driver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignition
Ignition Off Operation
switch and the passenger-side power outlet is connected
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle directly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet will
Information Center (EVIC)
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 with an optional Smoker’s Package).
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Instrument Panel Outlets
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® cigar
knob and element must be used.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
One outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped)
shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument
panel and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceed
a maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared
between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor
console outlet.
On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power
outlets are located under the retractable cover. To access
the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it
toward the instrument panel.
3
Super Console Outlets
Removable Console Outlet
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and
the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both controlled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can
support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts
(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.
The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a
key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The
power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is
powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or with
Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or with
Console Front
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or
with Console Center
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
3
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) converts
DC current to AC current, and is located on the left rear
trim panel immediately behind the second row left
passenger seat.
Power Inverter Outlet
The power inverter switch is located on the instrument
panel below the climate controls.
To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Press
the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
There are cupholders located throughout the interior. All
liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible liner
from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge
for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instrument
Panel Cupholders” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
3
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Cupholders
variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the
container to engage the cupholder retention features.
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out
drawer just above the lower storage bin.
Super Console — If Equipped
On models equipped with the Super Console, there are
two cupholders located in the center of the console.
Front Cupholders
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.
The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
Super Console Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the
pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console.
Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the
cupholders.
Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped
On models equipped with premium center consoles,
there are four cupholders located on the top of the
console.
3
Rear Cupholders
Premium Console Cupholders
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Bottle Holders
There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommodates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Interior Bottle Holder
Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating.
The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
Upper Glove Compartment
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s To open the upper compartment, press in on the button,
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one located on the left side of the upper door. The door will
of the two cupholders in the center front instrument automatically open.
panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the
thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Upper Compartment
To close the compartment door, push downward on the
door’s surface to latch the door closed.
3
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Glove Compartment
Door Trim Panel Storage
To open the lower compartment pull out on the release Front Door Storage
handle.
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
Lower Compartment
The driver’s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all
models and an optional secondary mesh pocket.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
Umbrella Holder
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into
the left front door entry scuff molding.
3
Driver’s Seatback Storage
1 — Bag Holder
2 — Standard Pocket
3 — Mesh Pocket
Umbrella Holder
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
The area below the floor covers, located in front of the the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙unlocked⬙
position to allow greater access to the storage bin.
second row seats, is available for storage.
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
• In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the second row
seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the
storage bin, children can die from suffocation or heat
stroke.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mecha- inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
nism.
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage — If
Equipped
The overhead storage system comes in several options.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Cargo Area Storage
Overhead Console Features
1 — DVD*
2 — Rear HVAC
3 — Courtesy Lights
4 — Storage
* If equipped, otherwise storage.
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Storage
DVD*
Courtesy Lights
Halo Lighting
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
closing.
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONSOLE FEATURES
There are three consoles available: Basic, Premium and
Super.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Basic Console
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
Basic Console features consist of the following:
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor • The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
easily pass through the first row to the second.
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.
• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are
dishwasher safe for cleaning.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
• The cupholders are removable to access a large storage 2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/
hook.
bin.
• The basic console is removable from the vehicle for 3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole
is centered on the winch hole.
additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at
the console base.
4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing downward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the
To Remove The Basic Floor Console
cover plug.
1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to
clear the rear load floor hook.
WARNING!
3. Remove the console.
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly
higher than the rear).
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
3
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Premium Console — If Equipped
• 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power
inside the console for cell phones or other electronics
The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage • Rear occupant accessible
bin offers multiple configurations.
• Multiple adjustments
• Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for cleaning. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large • Removable from vehicle for additional floor space
cups or mugs with handles
The top and center console sections slide forward and
rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup
• Top tray storage
holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for
• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large
size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.
or other items
• Large console center storage will store headphones for Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders
the available rear DVD entertainment system or other and a convenient storage tray.
items
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large
storage area below.
3
Console Position 1
Console Position 2
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin
and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers.
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides
easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
the four cupholders for the second row passengers.
Dual Storage Bins
Console Position 4
Console Position 3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
To Remove The Premium Floor Console
4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated
in the rear floor bracket.
1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
console.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/
centimeters.
3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove
console.
To Reinstall The Premium Floor Console:
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly
Super Console — If Equipped
higher than the front).
The Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front
2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket.
lower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin
3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting and rear pull out drawer.
on the floor bracket.
The super console contains a pass through storage area
accessible for both the driver and front passenger.
3
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Lower Pass Through
Super Console
The super console tambour doors are opened by pushing 1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door
down on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The front 2 — Cupholder Light Ring
tambour door slides forward, the rear tambour door 3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door
slides rearward.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through CARGO AREA FEATURES
lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the
Rechargeable Flashlight
instrument panel, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the right side
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
of the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel
Located in the back of the super console is a storage
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers.
light bulbs and is powered by a lithium battery that
recharges when snapped back into place and the vehicle
is either running or the key is in the accessory position.
Rear Drawer Storage
3
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Press And Release
Three-Press Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE:
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed the
The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelmaximum vehicle load capacity.
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail
within the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
crossbars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
crossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack
does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
• Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or
stowed in the incorrect positions.
3
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
Deploying The Crossbars
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
Loosening Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to
keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw
down.
Deployed Position
Then, position the crossbars across the roof.
Stowed Position
NOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in
any two of the three deploy positions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307
3
Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three
Crossbar To Side Rail Installation
Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the
with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the thumb screws completely.
crossbars into the deployed positions.
308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stowing The Crossbars
Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again,
taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars
are identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once
the crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws
completely.
NOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with rail tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops.
Tightening Crossbar
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309
CAUTION!
Rail Tie Loops
• Check deployed crossbars frequently and retighten
thumb screws as necessary.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed.
• The load should be secured and placed on top of
the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a
blanket or other protective layer between the load
and the roof surface.
(Continued)
3
310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311
3
Sun Screen Retracted
Sun Screen Extended
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
top of the window.
base sill.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .320
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .321
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Trip A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Trip B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ To Reset A Trip Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
䡵 Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . . .349
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . .361
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped . .350
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .369
䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . . .370
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .370
䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play. . . . . .381
▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play . . . . .381
▫ Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .382
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
䡵 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .387
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .387
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . .393
䡵 Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Blu-ray™ Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio . . .402
▫ Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Play A Blu-ray™ Disc Using The Blu-ray™
Player — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is
Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ VES™ Remote Control — If Equipped . . . . . . .412
▫ Information Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Numeric Keypad Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .418
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Blu-ray™ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .421
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Shared Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Station List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Display Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed . . .428
▫ Disc Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Product Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
䡵 CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc MAINTENANCE . . . .442
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .443
▫ Winter Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped . .449
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Vents
— Instrument Cluster
— Shift Lever
— Radio
5
6
7
8
— Analog Clock
— Upper Glove Compartment
— Lower Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
9 — DVD – If Equipped
10 — Storage Bin
11 — Cup Holders
12 — Switch Bank
13
14
15
16
—
—
—
—
Ignition Switch
Hood Release
Dimmer Switch
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
with either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
to alert you to turn the signal off. If either indicator flashes
2. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
This indicator will illuminate when the front
5. High Beam Indicator
fog lights are on.
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever for3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
This indicator will illuminate when the park toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
lights or headlights are turned on.
6. Odometer Display/Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped
Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been
driven.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
Message Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar
LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
L/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information to
Base Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on steering
LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant
wheel) to access or reset the display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in noFUSE
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
located in the instrument cluster.
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display area. For further information on fuses and
Display — If Equipped” for further information.
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
LoW tirE
Vehicle”.
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
CHAngE OIL
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash in
gASCAP
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display indicator system is duty cycle-based, which means the
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the your personal driving style.
message. If the problem continues, the message will
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
release the STEP button on the steering wheel. To reset “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
the oil change indicator system (after performing the 7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
scheduled maintenance), perform the following steps.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
not start the engine).
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
within 10 seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
— If Equipped
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
CAUTION! (Continued)
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
to continue to function properly.
an Onboard Diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission conCAUTION!
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
warning have been established for the tire size ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operaCertain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
tion or sensor damage may result when using repoor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
placement equipment that is not of the same size, engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
(Continued)
not require towing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Light — If Equipped
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conmomentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
trol (ESC) is off.
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the 12. Speedometer
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
Indicates vehicle speed.
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking 13. Fuel Door Reminder
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
vehicle.
14. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
15. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
16. Shift Lever Indicator
NOTE:
• You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
• The highest available transmission gear is displayed
in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/selector on the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to
“Automatic Transmission” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the 17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxiautomatic transmission.
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. Brake Warning Light
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
19. Seat Belt Reminder Light
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
the
driver
or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
20. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
21. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
This light shows the status of the electrical charging
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
system. The light should come on when the ignition
switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as 24. Engine Temperature Warning Light
a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
This light warns of an overheated engine conditurn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical devices
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMME- Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
DIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is
22. Charging System Light
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting allowed to cool.
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
23. Oil Pressure Warning Light
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the veThis light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
chime will sound when this light turns on.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
26. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
During sustained high speed driving or trailer
towing up long grades on hot days, the autoElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
matic transmission oil may become too hot.
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
When the transmission overheat warning light
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, turns on, you will experience reduced vehicle perforhave the system checked by an authorized dealer.
mance until the automatic transmission cools down.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the Once the transmission has cooled down and the light
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the turns off, you may continue to drive normally. If the high
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is speed is maintained, the overheating will continue to
occur.
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
If the overheating continues, it may become necessary to
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with the
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authotransmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off.
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required and you may experience reduced performance,
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
4
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Radio Information
instrument cluster.
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire PSI
• Vehicle Info
• Messages
• Units
• System Setup (Personal Settings)
• Turn Menu Off
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
UP Button
Press and release the UP button to scroll upward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units,
System Setup) and sub-menus.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
DOWN Button
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and The EVIC display consists of three sections:
sub-menus.
1. The top line where compass direction and outside
temperature are displayed.
SELECT Button
The SELECT button allows access to informa- 2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
messages are displayed.
tion in EVIC submenus, selects some feature
settings, and resets some EVIC features. The 3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odomEVIC prompts the driver when the SELECT
eter line.
button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.
BACK Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu or sub-menu.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this message type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the Wrong Key
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
Damaged Key
middle, and red telltales on the left.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays Key not programmed
the following messages:
Vehicle Not in Park
Key in ignition
Key Left Vehicle
Ignition or Accessory On
Key Not Detected
Remote start aborted — Door ajar
Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts
moving)
Remote start aborted — Fuel low
Low Tire Pressure
Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System” in “Starting And Operating”)
Remote start active — Push Start Button
Remote start active — Key to Run
Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to XX”
Turn Signal On
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RKE Battery Low
Service Keyless System
Low Washer Fluid
Oil Change Required
Check Gascap
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Park Assist Disabled
Service Park Assist System
Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park
Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed when
the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind Spot
System has been turned off.
Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is
displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor blockage, electronic interference, or other ⬙temporary⬙ conditions. When this message is displayed both outside rear
view icons will be illuminated. If electronic interference is
present, the BSM system will illuminate the icon only on
the side of interference as long as interference is present.
Service Blind Spot System — This message is displayed
to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is
permanently unavailable. The driver will receive an
EVIC message and the BSM display warning in both
mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If this message
is present see an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
EVIC White Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Electronic Range Select (ERS) Status
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
The shift lever status “5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicating
the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” indicate the EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has been engaged This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telland the gear selected is displayed. For further informa- tales. These telltales include:
tion on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating”.
• Low Fuel Light
• Electronic Speed Control Ready
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
This light will turn on when the electronic
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
speed control is ready. For further information, fuel is added.
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Loose Gascap Indicator
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly telltales include:
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator • Door Ajar
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
more doors may be ajar.
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap • Oil Pressure Warning Light
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
This light will turn on to indicate the wind- and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
shield washer fluid is low.
sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
• Charging System Light
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the
light does not come on during starting, have the system
This light shows the status of the electrical chargchecked by an authorized dealer.
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authosystem. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
rized dealer.
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
require towing.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condiThis light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apwith severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Oil Change Required
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds,
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE Fuel Economy
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
OFF/LOCK position.
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy funcVehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
tions display in the EVIC:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
• Average Fuel Economy (AVG)
not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times • Distance To Empty (DTE)
within 10 seconds.
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
Average Fuel Economy
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not Average Fuel Economy can be reset by following the
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT button. When the
fuel economy is reset, the display will read “zero” for two
seconds. Then, the history information will be erased,
and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Average Fuel Economy Display
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph
form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
habits in order to increase fuel economy.
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Speed
Trip A
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the
current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
between mph or km/h.
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Elapsed Time
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
EVIC.
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
Trip Info
or START position.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT To Reset A Trip Function
button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons to Reset will only occur while a resettable function is
highlight one of the following functions if you want to selected (highlighted). Press and hold the SELECT button
reset it:
to clear the resettable function being displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Tire PSI
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT
button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire
pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display any one of the following choices.
Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped
Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch position, current ignition status
status indicator.
will be displayed in the lower right corner of the EVIC
• Engine Hours
display to the right of the odometer value.
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting And OperMessages #
ating” for more information.
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning messages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Press
and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more
than one message to step through the remaining stored
messages. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to
the Main Menu.
Compass / Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
then press the SELECT button.
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated. 3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or
displayed in the EVIC then press and release the
more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal
SELECT button.
or metallic objects). The compass will now function
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
normally.
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
the EVIC.
environment free from large metallic objects such as build5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
Manual Compass Calibration
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
Automatic Compass Calibration
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the Compass Variance
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Compass Variance Map
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the
SELECT button. The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙System
Setup⬙ is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC. Then
press the SELECT button to enter the System Setup
sub-menu. Press and release the UP or DOWN button to
select a feature form the following choices:
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
Language
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
When in this display you may select one of six languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
Compass Variance
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the UP or
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
DOWN button while in this display and scroll through
the language choices. Press the SELECT button to select
Customer-Programmable Features (System
English, Spanish (Español), French (Français), Italian,
Setup)
German, Dutch. Then, as you continue, the information
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features will display in the selected language.
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
Nav–Turn By Turn
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE When this feature is selected the navigation system
NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select “System utilizes voice commands, guiding you through the drive
Setup” from the main menu.
5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
route mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destination is reached. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System
Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
Auto Unlock Doors
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
Remote Unlock Sequence
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
is removed showing the system has been deactivated. door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
transmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If
this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings can only return to the memory set
position using the door mounted switch. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the Flash
Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Horn With Remote Start
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “SmartBeam™” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxireverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned Key-Off Power Delay
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
When this feature is selected, the power window
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone (if equipped), DVD
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
setting has been selected.
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped
that the setting has been selected.
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
Headlamps With Wipers (Available With Auto
Headlights Only)
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Illuminated Approach
Flashers With Sliding Door
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate
when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,
signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or
entering the vehicle. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry)
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the Blind Spot Alert
feature showing the system has been activated or the
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
Alert (“Blind Spot Alert Lights”, “Blind Spot Alert
deactivated.
Lights/CHM”, “Blind Spot Alert Off”). The Blind Spot
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights”
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set mode, when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding alert in the outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert feature
can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM”
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
mode, in this mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
Tilt Mirror In Reverse
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Blind
a reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward Spot Alert Off” is selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and system is deactivated.
avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
Easy Exit Seat
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When selected, the headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is
in any gear except PARK. This provides a constant lights
on condition until the ignition is turned OFF. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
the setting has been selected.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
in the BSM not operating to specification.
IF EQUIPPED
Calibrate Compass
Refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual for deRefer to “Compass Display” for more information.
tailed operating instructions.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) —
If Equipped
Turn Menu Off
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Press and release SELECT to turn the menu off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Uconnect® 130
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases
the volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
will begin to blink.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conanother selection. Holding either button will bypass
trol knob to save time change.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
TIME Button
RW/FF
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
and radio frequency.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
Clock Setting Procedure
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. AM or FM frequencies.
SEEK Buttons
TUNE Control
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SCROLL control knob.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Memory
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
treble tones.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but DISC Button
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the MP3 Audio Play
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM NOTE:
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
to operate the radio.
pressing the pushbutton twice.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
button number will display.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Inserting Compact Disc(s)
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
stations).
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
(Continued)
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on RW/FF
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
SEEK Button
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
button operates in a similar manner.
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the AM/FM Button
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
CD and MP3 modes.
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
change of pace.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
TIME Button
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of folder levels: 8
file recording media and formats are limited. When
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
Supported Media (Disc Types)
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this disThe medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
play.)
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
character extension)
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD
audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs
created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing⬙
are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession
for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc
loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension
as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension
may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to
recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
file.
supported by the radios.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an
MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates supported.
(VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a
44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit
rate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Playback Of MP3 Files
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected vehicle speakers.
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
ACC position to operate the radio.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
another selection. Holding either button will bypass Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
details.
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Equipped
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature screen.
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further
TIME Button
details.
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
and radio frequency.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio Clock Setting Procedure
screen.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
will begin to blink.
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- RW/FF
trol knob to save time change.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the AM or FM frequencies.
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select TUNE Control
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
procedure, starting at step 2.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be setreble tones.
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth Music Type information.
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the format types:
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
16-Digit Character Display
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Program Type
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be Memory
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
SETUP Button
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
the following items:
station and press and release that button. If a button is
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the be stored into pushbutton memory.
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL conthe SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
save time change.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
AM/FM Button
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
pressing the pushbutton twice.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
button number will display.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Buttons 1 - 6
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
stations).
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
DISC/AUX Button
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
NOTE:
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC will show the track number, and index time in minutes
position to operate the radio.
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD and MP3 modes.
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
TIME Button
change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ranbegin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or dom Play.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button Notes On Playing MP3 Files
works in a similar manner.
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
AM/FM Button
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricPress the button to select either AM or FM mode.
tions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
Layer
3
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rates.
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Playback Of MP3 Files
LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the limited coverage in Alaska.
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume System Activation
down.
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Please have the following information available when Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
calling:
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Satellite Antenna
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Operating Instructions — Uconnect® (Satellite)
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly Mode
on or above the antenna.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
Reception Quality
ACC position to operate the radio.
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the SEEK Buttons
following reasons:
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
structure or under a physical obstacle.
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
SCAN Button
cause intermittent reception.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause signal blockage.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
INFO Button
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
RW/FF
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
direction of the arrows.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. Buttons 1 - 6
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but- Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be Equipped
stored into pushbutton memory.
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument NOTE: This section is for Uconnect® 130/230 radios
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is only. For Uconnect® 430/430N, 730N, 731N, 735N or 431
correct.
touchscreen radio iPod®/USB/MP3 control feature, refer
to the separate Supplement Manual. iPod®/USB/MP3
control is available only if equipped as an option with
these radios.
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compartment.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
Setting The Analog Clock
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect® Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod® or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod® / MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
located in the glove compartment.
USB Connector Port
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position
where the iPod® or consumer electronic audio device
cable can be routed through without damaging the cable
when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the glove compartment, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
Using This Feature
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to
connect to the USB port:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
audio device).
pressing radio switches, as described below.
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely disUsing Radio Buttons
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained. To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/ access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX”
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level. button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and
say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod®/USB/
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio • Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
Play Mode
track.
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF>> button.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
USB device and display data:
jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the VR
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
Track.⬙
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
previous track.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off.⬙
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 de- audio device.
vice scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
each track in the current list and then forward to the
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
device or external USB device.
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
and next tracks.
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
•
•
•
•
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay • Preset 6 – Podcasts
in updating the information on the radio display may
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list
be noticeable.
on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of • To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclocksame PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
wise) to get to the track faster.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
level menu of the iPod® or external USB device.
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or exter• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item
nal USB device:
to be selected and press the TUNE control knob. This
Preset 1 – Playlists
will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
Preset 2 – Artists
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
Preset 3 – Albums
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect® phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the
radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Streaming Audio.”
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting A Different Audio Device
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
playing will display info.
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) — IF
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.
EQUIPPED
Next Track
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES™) is
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the designed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can
radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio over the
track on your cellular phone.
wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices. Please review
Previous Track
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on and operation.
the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
1. Press the PHONE button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Getting Started
• Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
• Screen(s) located in the overhead console: Unfold the • Your vehicle may be equipped with either a standard
overhead LCD screen(s) by pushing the button on the
DVD player or a Blu-ray™ Disc Player. If equipped
overhead console behind the screen(s).
with a Blu-ray™ Disc Player, the icon will be present
on the Player.
• Turn on the Player (if equipped on Dual Screen System) by pushing the Power button, located on the far
left, or by pressing the button on the Remote Control.
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Bluray™ Disc is inserted into the VES™ player, the
screen(s) turn(s) on automatically, the headphone
transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Video Entertainment System (VES™)
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• For Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 on the
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1
(second row) and Channel 2 on the Remote Control
and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (third row). Refer to
the Dual Video Screen section for more information.
playback does not begin automatically after the disc is
inserted into the Blu-ray™ Player press the play button.
If playback does not begin automatically after the disc is
inserted into Blu-ray™ VES™ disc Player follow these
steps:
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occu- Using The Touchscreen Radio
pants using either the touchscreen radio, the DVD or
• Press the MENU hard-key, then touch the Rear VES™
Blu-ray™ Disc Player, or by the rear seat occupants
soft-key. If a chapter list appears on the right side of
using the remote control.
the screen, touch the hide list soft-key to display the
Rear VES™ control screen.
Blu-ray™ Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc
To view a Blu-ray™ disc, insert the disc into the Bluray™ VES™ disc Player. Playback will begin automatically after the Blu-ray™ is recognized by the disc drive. If
• Touch the 1 soft-key to select an audio channel, then
touch the VES™ Disc soft-key in the media column.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Channel 1 for 2nd row screen
and Channel 2 for 3rd row screen), then press the
source key and select VES™ Disc from the menu.
• Press popup/menu key to navigate disc menu and
options.
4
NOTE: Due to the size of the content on a Blu-ray™ Disc,
the disc may not start playing immediately.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks or HDMI port, located on the left side behind
1 — HDMI port
the second row seat.
RCA/HDMI/USB Inputs
2 — Audio/Video In
3 — Power Outlet
4 — USB Ports (Charge Only)
5 — Power Inverter
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
Select VES™ AUX1 Mode On The VES™ Screen
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES™
AUX 1, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right but- Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
tons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
press ENTER on the Remote Control.
2. Touch the Rear VES™ soft-key to display the Rear
VES™ Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the
HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
4
Rear VES™ Soft-key
Select Channel/Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The VES™
Column
3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then touch either AUX 1 or
AUX 2 in the VES™ column (depending which AUX Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
input is used). To exit press the back arrow soft-key at Video Is Playing On Channel 1
the top of the screen.
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly press the
SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio
source appears on the screen.
Select FM Mode On The VES™ Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow
2. Touch the Rear VES™ soft-key to display the Rear
soft-key at the top left of the left screen.
VES™ Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the
HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
4
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The Media
Column
Rear VES™ Soft-Key
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES™).
starts playing the first track.
• The Remote Control
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
switch is on Channel 1.
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
4. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
NOTE: Headunit DVD player does not play Blu-ray™
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
Discs.
on Channel 2.
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
radio faceplate (Touchscreen).
Dual Video Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Using The Remote Control
NOTE:
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly • Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
pressing the SOURCE button, then press ENTER/OK.
on the right side of the screen.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES™ soft-key to display the Rear
VES™ Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the
HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
Select DISC Mode On The VES™ Screen
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. If available, the vehicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with an automatic transmission. In vehicles with a manual transmission the
parking brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touchscreen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
the MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow at
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
the top left of the screen.
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
Rear VES™ Soft-key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player — If
Equipped
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The VES™
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight VES™ DISC
player automatically selects the appropriate mode
by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or
after the disc is recognized and starts playing the
by repeatedly pressing the SOURCE button, then press
DVD.
ENTER/OK on the Remote Control.
NOTE: The VES™ player has basic DVD control function such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop.
2. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
on Channel 2.
Select VES™ DISC Mode On The VES™ Screen
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES™ soft-key to display the Rear
Rear VES™ Soft-key
VES™ Controls. If a channel list is displayed, touch
the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES™ 3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in
the VES™ column. To exit touch the back arrow
Controls screen.
soft-key at the top left of the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. If available, the vehicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with an automatic transmission. In vehicles with a manual transmission the
parking brake must be engaged.
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc Using The Blu-ray™ Player —
If Equipped
Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The VES™
Column
NOTE:
1. Insert the Blu-ray™ Disc with the label facing up. The
Blu-ray™ Player automatically selects the appropriate
mode after the disc is recognized and starts playing
the Blu-ray™ Disc.
NOTE: The Blu-ray™ Player has basic control functions
such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop.
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC 2. To watch a Blu-ray™ Disc on Screen 1 for second row
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headtab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
phone switch is on Channel 1.
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To watch a Blu-ray™ Disc on Screen 2 for third row Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Head1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
phone switch is on Channel 2.
2. Touch the Rear VES™ soft-key to display the Rear
Using The Remote Control
VES™ Controls. If a channel list is displayed, touch
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Blu-ray™ Player
the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES™
Remote Control.
Controls screen.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight Blu-ray™ by 3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the VES™ Disc
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
soft-key in the VES™ column. To exit touch the back
repeatedly pressing the SOURCE button, then press
arrow soft-key at the top left of the screen.
OK on the Remote Control.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• To view a Blu-ray™ Disc on the radio press the
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
RADIO/MEDIA hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then
on the left side of the screen.
touch the VES™ Disc tab soft-key and then the VIEW
VIDEO soft-key.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
• Viewing a Blu-ray™ Disc on the Touchscreen radio 2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
screen is not available in all states/provinces. If availthe desired audio source or repeatedly press the
able, the vehicle must be stopped and the shift lever
SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio
must be in the PARK position for vehicles with an
source appears on the screen.
automatic transmission. In vehicles with a manual
transmission the parking brake must be engaged.
Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is
Playing
4
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch are on
the same channel. If watching a video on Screen 1
(second row), then Channel 2 could be used for audio. If
watching a video on Screen 2 (third row), then Channel 1
could be used for audio.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
Select FM Mode On The VES™ Screen
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow
2. Touch the Rear VES™ soft-key to display the Rear VES™
soft-key at the top left of the left screen.
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES™ Controls screen.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The Media
Column
Rear VES™ Soft-Key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
• Selecting a video source on Channel 2, the video
source will display on the third row screen or Screen 2
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
and can be heard on Channel 2.
and video simultaneously.
• The 2nd row screen and 3rd row screen of the Video
• The Blu-ray™ Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Entertainment System can play two separate discs by
Blu-ray™ Discs.
utilizing the touchscreen radio DVD player and Blu• The DVD Player can play CDs and DVDs.
ray™ Disc Player.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 • Audio can be heard through the headphones even
and the right side equates to Channel 2.
when the screen(s) are closed.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
source will display on the second row screen or Screen
1 and can be heard on Channel 1.
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
VES™ Remote Control — If Equipped
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position,
the remote controls the functionality of headphone
Channel 1 (right side of the screen). When the selector
Remote Control
switch is in the Channel 2, position the remote controls
Controls And Indicators
the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of
the screen).
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable 10. PROG Up/Down / Rewind/skip back and fast fwd/
station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
skip forward – When listening to a radio mode,
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressmenu modes use to navigate in the menu.
ing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in
the radio. When listening to compressed audio on a
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the
data disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to
PROG Down selects the previous directory. When
the start of the current or previous audio track or
listening to a disc in a radio with a multiple-disc
video chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the
changer, PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG
menu.
Down selects the previous disc.
7. POP UP/MENU – Press to return to the main menu of
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
a DVD disc, to select a satellite audio channel from the
for the selected channel.
Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
RANDOM for a CD).
12. SLOW – If Equipped – Press to slow playback of a
DVD disc. Press play (䉴) to resume normal play.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
13. STATUS – If Equipped – Press to display the current
9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play
status.
4
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. MODE/SOURCE – Press to change the mode of the 17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
selected channel. See the Mode Selection section of
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video
this manual for details on changing modes.
chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the display 18. ENTER/OK – Press to select the highlighted option
in a menu.
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the
is selected and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP
next audio track or video chapter. In menu modes,
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
use to navigate in the menu.
Setup Menu of this manual.)
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a
DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s
contents.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control — If Equipped
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE – Press to enter Source Selection screen.
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (second row). When the selector switch is in the
Rear 2, position the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (third row).
5. 䉴 – Press to navigate menus.
4
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. SETUP – Press to access the Blu-ray™ Setup menu 11. KEYPAD – Press to navigate chapters or titles.
screen. When a disc is loaded in the Blu-ray™ player
12. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
(if equipped) and the VES™ mode is selected and the
disc is stopped, press the SETUP button to access the 13. 䉳䉳 – Press and release to jump to the previous
Blu-ray™ Setup menu.
audio track or video chapter. Press and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video
7. 䉴䉴 – Press and release to jump to the next available
chapter.
audio track or video chapter. Press and hold to fast
forward through the current audio track or video 14. MUTE – Mutes headphone audio.
chapter.
15. BACK – Press to exit out of menus or return to source
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
selection screen.
9. Four Colored Buttons – Press to access Blu-ray™ Disc 16.
features.
17.
10. POPUP/MENU – Press to access the Blu-ray™ main
18.
menu when in Blu-ray™ or DVD mode. Press to start
Scan or start Random track functions in CD or HDD 19.
modes.
䉲 – Press to navigate menus.
OK – Press to select the highlighted option in a menu.
䉳 – Press to navigate menus.
䉱 – Press to navigate menus.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
4
The Remote Control Storage
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
• To disable the Remote Control from making any
changes, press the Video Lock button on the DVD
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
player (if equipped). If the vehicle is not equipped Headphones Operation
with a DVD player, follow the radio’s instructions to The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
turn Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s) using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
indicate when Video Lock is active.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
• Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
operation of the VES™.
do so for themselves.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op- verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
eration. To replace the batteries:
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
Blu-ray™ Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
VES™ Headphones
1 — Volume Control
2 — Power Button
3 — Channel Selection Switch
4 — Power Indicator
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
4
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
Blu-ray™ VES™ Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
gate to the available modes and press the OK button to
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
select the new mode.
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
NOTE:
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is 5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
BACK button on the remote control.
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
2. Press the SOURCE button on the remote control.
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such operation. To replace the batteries:
as a DVD Video), pressing DISPLAY shows the status • Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
Pressing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
downward.
mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such
as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen. • Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
4
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
System Information
Shared Modes
This allows the VES™ to output radio sources to the
headphones and the radio to output VES™ sources to the
vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ channel 1 or
2 are in the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be
visible on the radio’s display for that channel, and the
shared icon will be visible on the VES™ screen. When in
shared mode, the same audio source is heard in the
shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293- If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
3332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com. mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
changed to a mode that is different from the VES™
1-888-293-3332.
selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT).
4
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The VES™ has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM), Information Mode Display
SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as
long as it is not in shared mode.
When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES™
have control of the video functions. The VES™ has the
ability to control the following video modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the
Information Mode Video Screen Display
radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes 1. Channel 1 Mode
on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
2. Channel 1 Shared Status
3. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
4. Channel 2 Mode
Numeric Keypad Menu
5. Channel 2 Shared Status
6. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute
7. Channel 1 ENTER/OK Button Action
8. Channel 2 ENTER/OK Button Action
4
9. Clock
10. Video Lock
11. Not Available / Error
Numeric Keypad Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s OK
button activates a numeric keypad menu. This screen
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency, satellite Station List Menu
channel, or track number. To enter the desired digit:
When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list of all
available channels. Navigate this list using the remote
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote con- station, press the remote control’s ENTER/OK button to
trol’s ENTER/OK button to select the digit. Repeat tune to that station. To jump through the list more
these steps until all digits are entered.
quickly, navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and the screen.
press the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and press the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
Disc Menu
Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the remote
control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the video
on the screen. The factory default settings are already set
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
Disc Menu For CDs
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if
of all commands which control playback of the disc. Using equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote
the options you can activate or cancel Scan play and player.
Random play.
4
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
Disc Formats
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the The DVD player is capable of playing the following types
screen closed:
of discs (12 cm or 8 cm diameter):
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select • Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
the next available audio mode without using the
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
format files
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is • Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the The Blu-Ray™ Player is capable of the playing the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press following types of discs (12 cm diameter):
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
DVD-VR
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
• Other compression formats such as Xvid and RMP4
will not play. The Blu-Ray™ Player will automatically
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
skip the file and begin playing the next available file.
profile 3.0
• For the lack of indexes DivX files, “Resume Play,” “Fast
Compressed Video Files (DivX)
Forward” and “Fast Rewind” cannot be supported.
The Blu-Ray™ Player is capable of playing DivX files
from a CD disc (usually a CD-R, CD-RW) or a DVD disc • DivX Home Theater Profile 3.0 requires:
• Maximum resolution 720 x 480 @ 30fps or 720 x 576
(usually a DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW or DVD+RW).
@ 25fps
• The Blu-Ray™ Player always uses the file extension to
• Minimum resolution 16 x 16
determine the video format, so DivX files must always
• Maximum frame rate for progressive source 30
end with the extension “.div”, “divx” or “.avi.” To
frames per second
prevent incorrect playback, do not use these extensions
•
Maximum field rate for interlaced source 60 fields
for any other types of files.
per second
• For DivX files, only DivX Home Theater Profile Ver.3.0
• To change the current chapter, use the remote control’s
is supported.
or Blu-Ray™ Player’s “Fast Forward” button to ad• Any file that is copy protected will not play. The
vance to the next chapter, or the “Fast Rewind” button
Blu-Ray™ Player will automatically skip the file and
to return to the start of the current or previous chapter.
begin playing the next available file.
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
4
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DVD/Blu-ray™/BD Region Codes
Recorded Discs
The DVD player/Blu-ray™ Player and many DVD/Bluray™ Discs are coded by geographic region. These region
codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the
region code for the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc does not match
the region code for the player, the disc will stop playing
and a warning will be displayed.
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3, WMA or AAC (Blu-ray™ Disc
Player only) files. The player will also play DVD-Video
content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. DVDROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player,
the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
Video title is ignored). All multi - channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD- If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so playable in the DVD player, check with the disc recording
each track number is unique.
software publisher for more information about burning
playable discs.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
Other formats (such as HFS, or others) are not sup- (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
ported.
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
• Blu-ray™ Disc Player can extend 2000 files and 255
DVD player.
folders.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 / WMA and ACC)
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
The DVD/Blu-ray™ Player (if equipped) is capable of
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
playing MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Win• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play dows Media Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
CD-R or CD-RW).
• Mixed disc which contains ⬙DivX⬙ will be priority • The DVD player always uses the file extension to
played on Blu-ray™ Disc Player.
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
4
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
•
•
•
⬙.WMA.⬙ AAC files must always end with the exten- • If you are creating your own files, the recommended
sion ⬙aac⬙ or ⬙AAC.⬙ To prevent incorrect playback, do
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192 Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
not use these extensions for any other types of files.
between 64 and 192 Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
supported. For both formats, the recommended
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
sample rate is either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
For Blu-ray™ files, only version 1.0 / 1.1 / 2.2 / 2.3
• To change the current file, use the DVD player’s 䉱
and 2.4 ID3 tag data (such as artist name, track title,
button to advance to the next file, or the 䉲 button to
album, etc.) are supported.
return to the start of the current or previous file.
Any file that is copy protected (such as those down• To change the current directory, use the remote conloaded from many online music stores) will not play.
trol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
begin playing the next available file.
Disc Errors
Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
player will automatically skip the file and begin play- message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is
automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible
ing the next available file.
disc format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or Display
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD player Other Language Setup
will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping
forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end of the disc
is reached, the DVD player will return to the beginning of
the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120° F (49° C). The Blu-ray™ Player may
shut down when the vehicle’s interior temperature exceeds 140° F (60° C). When this occurs, the DVD/Bluray™ Player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off
the display until a safe temperature is reached. This
shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD/
Blu-ray™ Player.
The Blu-ray™ player may require additional reading
time during extremely cold weather conditions. When
this occurs, allow the vehicles interior temperature to
warm, then insert disc into player.
4
DVD Player Language Menu
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or English. These languages are selected using a special fourdigit code.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter
radio disc mode, then DVD setup and follow these
additional instructions:
selecting the digit, press the remote control’s Right
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit
selection sequence for all four digits.
• When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the language
code is not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙夡⬙.
If the digits are visible after this step, then the language code is valid.
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but- Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
tons, highlight the Language item you want to edit, language codes, please contact the dealer where the
and then press the remote control ENTER/OK button. vehicle was purchased.
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select
the ⬙Other⬙ setting, then press the remote control’s
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, select a digit for the current position. After
Language
Dutch
German
Portuguese
Code
2311
1304
2519
Language
French
Italian
Spanish
Code
1517
1819
1418
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
Rating And Password Setup
The Rating and Password settings work together to control
the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most DVDVideo discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to them
where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and
higher numbers are designated for more adult audiences.
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
password) and the default password is 0000.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.
4
DVD Password Entry
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • After the four-digit password is entered, press the remote
follow these additional instructions:
control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the change.
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
value for the current digit, and then press the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password
is correct, the set password screen is displayed.
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits,
enter the new password.
DVD Player Level Menu
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
follow these additional instructions:
buttons, select the new rating level, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
change.
buttons, select the Rating tab.
Product Agreement
• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then press the remote
Software
control’s ENTER/OK button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set
the value for the current digit, and then press the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four
digits.
This product contains software licensed under GNU
General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General
Public License (LGPL), etc. You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code
of the GPL/LGPL software. You may download Source
Code from the following website at no charge.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the URL: http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password oss/download/SRC_632_34W821
is correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
The website provides the Source Code ⬙As Is⬙ and
without warranty of any kind. By downloading Source
4
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associ- • THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERated with downloading and using the Source Code and
SONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONcomplying with the user agreements that accompany
SUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
each Source Code. Please note that we cannot respond to
WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (⬙VC-1 VIDEO⬙)
any inquiries regarding the source code.
AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERPATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
SONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONAND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
VIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO
WITH THE AVC STANDARD (⬙AVC VIDEO⬙)
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERMAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
SONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO Patents
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR Cinavia Notice
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of
unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohib- • This product incorporates copyright protection techited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message
nology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright prowill be displayed and playback or copying will be
tection technology must be authorized by Macroviinterrupted. More information about Cinavia technology
sion, and is intended for home and other limited
is provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information
Center at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with
prohibited.
your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information
Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
• Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:
This product incorporates proprietary technology under
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
license from Verance Corporation and is protected by
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos,
patents issued and pending as well as copyright and
Symbol and DTS 2.0 Channel are trademarks of DTS,
trade secret protection for certain aspects of such techInc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
nology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation.
Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. All rights • Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
reserved by Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly
Dolby Laboratories.
is prohibited.
4
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format Trademark
created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation.
• Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™ and the logos are trademarks
This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX
of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
video. Visit divx.com for more information and software
• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its
tools to convert your files into DivX videos.
affiliates.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purCAUTION!
chased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain
your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more procedures other than those specified herein may
information on how to complete your registration.
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are
used under license.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different,
depending on which mode you are in.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch operation in each mode.
4
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Operation
CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc MAINTENANCE
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc in good condition,
listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch take the following precautions:
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch
surface.
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
wiping from center to edge.
CD Player
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchPressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
ing the disc.
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
too high.
function in this mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
before considering disc player service.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System —
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in If Equipped
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does conditions.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
With the Three-Zone Temperature Control system, each
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
front seat occupant can independently control the Heatturned down or off during mobile phone operation when
ing, Ventilation and Air Conditioning operations coming
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.
4
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
When the front control is in any position other than rear,
the front control operates all the rear functions.
The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit operation. Rear Panel mode is automatically selected when the
front control is in the Panel mode. When the front unit is
in Bi-Level mode, airflow will be emitted from both the
upper and lower rear outlets. When the front control is in
Floor, Defrost, or Mix modes, airflow will be directed out
of the rear floor outlets.
Manual Temperature Control
1. Left Front Temperature Control
Provides left front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer
temperature settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
2. Rear Blower Control — If Equipped
5. Right Front Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the rear system in any mode you select. The rear
blower speed increases as you move the control to the
right from the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower
speeds. To allow the rear overhead control, turn blower
knob fully to the left, past The ⬙O⬙ off position into the
“REAR” control position.
Provides right front seat occupant with independent
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
warmer temperature settings.
6. Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
3. Front Blower Control
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced while reducing moisture on the windshield.
through the system in any mode you select. The blower 7. Front Defrost Mode
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
Air is directed through the windshield and side
the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower speeds.
window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with
4. Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
Provides temperature control for the rear cabin. Turn left windshield and side window defrosting.
for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the
rear cabin.
4
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor may operate in NOTE:
Mix and Defrost, even if the A/C button is not pressed.
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a
improve fuel economy, use these modes only when
second time.
necessary.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window
8. Electronic Rear Window Defrost
defroster only when the engine is operating.
Press this button to turn on the rear window
CAUTION!
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
the heating elements:
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
minutes.
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
9. Recirculation Control Button
Press this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
vehicle. An indicator light will illuminate when
you are in Recirculation mode. Only use the
Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside
odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE:
• If the Recirculation button is pressed when the
system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED
indicator will flash three times to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For
maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
• In order to prevent fogging, when the Recirculation
button is pressed and the mode control is set to
Panel, the A/C will engage automatically.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
4
448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Press and release to change the current setting.
The indicator illuminates when ON.
12. Bi-Level Mode Button
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser. 13. Panel Mode Button
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrucondenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted for
11. Floor Mode Button
direction, and turned on or off to control airflow.
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
small amount through the defrost and side win- instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
dow demist outlets.
seat passengers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
center of the vehicle.
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
Economy Mode
Max A/C
4
For maximum cooling use the A/C and Recirculation
mode buttons at the same time.
Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped
The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air
outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
upper outlets.
1 — Rear Blower
3 — Rear Mode
2 — Rear Temperature
4 — Rear Climate Control Lock
450 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Blower Control
Rear Temperature Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
front ATC panel.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The heater outlets are located in the right side trim
panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are
ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 451
• When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode
operation, a comfort temperature can be set by using
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
the temperature up and down buttons, and the auto
floor outlets.
blower operation will be set automatically.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head• SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
allowing one comfort setting (driver setting) for the
Floor Mode
cabin, if desired.
Air comes from the floor outlets.
The Three-Zone ATC system automatically maintains the
interior comfort level desired by the driver and all
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
passengers. The system automatically adjusts the air
Equipped
temperature, the airflow volume, amount of outside air
• Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front
recirculation and the airflow direction. This maintains a
passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to
comfortable temperature, even under changing condiselect individual comfort settings.
tions.
Bi-Level Mode
4
452 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the left
front seat occupant.
3. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel,
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
4. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
5. Front Auto Indicator
Front ATC Panel
1. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode.
6. Auto Indicator
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. This indicates when the system is in Auto mode.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
into manual mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 453
7. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
rear climate control screen and allow the front seat
occupants control over the rear climate settings.
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
11. Rear Lock
front seat occupant.
8. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
selected.
Press and release the Rear Lock button on the front ATC
panel to lock and unlock the rear climate controls.
12. Auto Temperature Control Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
9. Passenger Temperature Control Up/Down Button
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
modes.
control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or
13. Climate Control OFF Button
the lower button for cooler temperature settings.
10. Rear Control Button
Provides toggle operation between front control screen
and rear control screen. Push the button to activate the
Press and release to turn the Climate Control OFF. If the
control is OFF, press any button to turn the control ON.
4
454 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Blower Control
18. Driver Temperature Control Up/Down Button
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed in- Provides the driver with independent temperature concreases as you move the control to the right from the trol. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the
lowest blower setting. Performing this function will lower button for cooler temperature settings.
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
Automatic Operation
15. Mode Control Button
1. Press the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the
Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, Biwords Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC
Level, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the
display, along with two temperatures for the driver
ATC to switch into manual mode.
and front passenger. The system will then automatically regulate the amount of airflow.
16. Recirculation Control Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, front
indicator illuminates when ON.
passenger, and rear seat rotary temperature knobs.
17. SYNC Button
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system
will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
Press and release to control the temperature setting for all
level.
three zones from the driver temperature control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 455
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the ing the front blower knob setting.
system to function automatically.
Manual Operation Override
NOTE:
This system offers a full complement of manual override
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
NOTE: If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in” the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually secustomer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec- lected to clear the windshield and side glass.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer- • Air Conditioning (A/C)
Programmable Features” in this Section.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
4
456 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C To change the rear system settings:
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
• Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
deactivate the A/C system.
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control functions now operate rear system.
NOTE:
• If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C • To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 457
1. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection.
2. Rear Temperature Display
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
This display shows the temperature setting for the rear
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headseat occupants.
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
3. Blower Control Display
Floor Mode
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
Air comes from the floor outlets.
4. Rear Auto Indicator
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
Equipped
Rear Mode Control
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear of the
right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to air through the headliner outlets.
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Headliner Mode
4
458 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The rear system temperature control is on the front ATC
panel located on the instrument panel.
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
ATC panel, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display.
The rear temperature and air source are controlled from
the front ATC panel.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 — Blower Speed
2 — Rear Temperature
3 — Rear Mode
4 — Rear Temperature Lock
1. Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock
icon in the rear temperature knob.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 459
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the • The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customercounterclockwise to AUTO.
Programmable Features” in this Section.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
Rear Blower Control
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The rear outlets are located in the right side trim
(Continued)
4
460 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
panel of the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants.
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
direct
the
flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperato
one
side
will shut off the airflow.
ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
front ATC panel.
Bi-Level Mode
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob
floor outlets.
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
ignored.
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 461
Floor Mode
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
Recirculation Control
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) is recommended.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humid- Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
to recirculate interior air by pressing the RecirWinter Operation
culation control button. Recirculation mode
should only be used temporarily. The recircu- To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perforlation LED will illuminate when this button is selected. mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functionPush the button a second time to turn off the Recircula- ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
tion mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation during Winter months is not recommended, because it
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window may cause window fogging.
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected.
Air comes from the floor outlets.
4
462 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vacation/Storage
Outside Air Intake
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Window Fogging
A/C Air Filter
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
instructions.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .476
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ — If Equipped . . . . . . .468
▫ Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . .
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .473
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . .
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .487
. . . . . . . . .487
. . . . . . . . .487
. . . . . . . . .488
. . . . . . . . .488
. . . . . . . . .488
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .512
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) . . . . . . . . .494 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .517
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .496
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .520
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .528
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .530 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .545
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .531
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .542
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .550 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .567
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Recreational Towing — All Models . . . . . . . . .568
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-NGo™ Key Fob is in the passenger
compartment.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Installing And Removing The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing The Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
Normal Starting
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and read- 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
able.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
position.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
Removing The Button
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
the button loose.
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
1. Place the shift lever/shift selector in PARK, then press
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions — With Driver’s
3. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK, the Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two Or NEUTRAL Position)
seconds or three short presses in a row with the The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates similar to an
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain and START. To change the ignition switch positions
in the ACC position until the shift lever/shift selector without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF follow these steps:
position. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed 1. Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
position, or it could roll.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time If Engine Fails To Start
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
WARNING!
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proceIf the engine fails to start after you have followed the
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
hold it.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
as soon as the starter engages.
hold it.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal,
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap
After Starting
that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
Module.
decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the full OFF (key removal)
position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK
position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position, and
the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position.
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve the vehicle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. Press the “econ” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel and a green light will indicate the
ECON mode is engaged.
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
• The torque converter clutch may engage at lower
engine speeds and remain on longer.
• The engine idle speed will be lower.
• The overall driving performance will be more conservative.
• Some ECON mode functions may be temporarily
inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is engaged, the
out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Intervehicle control systems will change the following:
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift later. lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
• The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to
allow the engine to operate at lower speeds.
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (described later in this section). Moving the shift lever to the left or right (–/+) while in the
DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Shift Lever
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade, and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. Once
the Key Fob is removed, the transmission is locked
in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be alone in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
DRIVE (D)
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downWARNING!
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characterispractices that limit your response to changing traffic tics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
vehicle and have a collision.
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (described below) to select a
lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
5. Restart the engine.
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal not shift above third gear (except to prevent engine
overspeed), but will shift down into second and first
operation.
gears normally.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
recur.
lever to the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that
service is required.
gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top
available gear.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Transmission
Gear Position
Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
1
2
3
4
5
6
D
1
1–2
1–3
1–4
1–5
1–6
1–6
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the
left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission
will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
•
•
•
•
•
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem- some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
perature.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera- the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
ture.
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Using the AutoStick® shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Traction
Acceleration
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Shallow Standing Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/ Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
and Warnings before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
The standard power steering system will give you good
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
does not in any way damage the steering system.
steering capability if power assist is lost.
POWER STEERING
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
Power Steering Fluid Check
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
there is a problem with the power steering system.
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici- If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho- level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
rized dealer.
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
Parking Brake
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
• Brake pedal pulsations.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
of the stop.
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
WARNING!
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophistisurfaces.
cated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
to interference caused by improperly installed, or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inhigh output radio transmitting equipment. This
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
debris, or panic stops.
braking capability. Installation of such equipment
should be performed by qualified professionals.
You may experience the following when the brake system
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
goes into anti-lock:
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
short time after the stop).
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• A clicking sound of solenoid valves.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the anti-lock brake system. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
accurate signals for the computer.
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition Traction Control System (TCS)
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
repaired as soon as possible.
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide enBrake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function- hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. functions similarly to a limited-slip differential, and
Consult with your authorized dealer service center as controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
soon as possible.
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
brake control system that includes the Traction Control the ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode.
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (in
Stability Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as the
Hill Start Assist (HSA). These systems complement the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. This
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator light
braking capability during emergency braking maneu- flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
vers.
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, Brake Assist System (BAS)
and do not switch off the ESC or TCS.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency brakWARNING!
ing maneuvers. The system detects an emergency brak• The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics ing situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
traction afforded.
• The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including those complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydro- results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
planing.
• The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
the safety of others.
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various
driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ESC Operating Modes
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the center
switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.
ESC On
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on
two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode
should be used for most driving situations. ESC should
only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch.
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
WARNING! (Continued)
except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
section, has been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sysLight” will be illuminated. When in the “Partial Off” mode,
tem is reduced.
ESC will operate without engine torque management. This
mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, • Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC
would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. This
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situaWARNING!
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
• When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the TCS functionality mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de- pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the ⴖESC Off Indicator Lightⴖ will be illuminated.
When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the engine power
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should turn off with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this NOTE:
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenspeeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authotarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further information. When TSC is functioning,
the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off.
WARNING!
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop
all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
during this short period of time, the system will release the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
WARNING!
the intended direction of travel.
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
HSA Activation Criteria
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
activate:
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak• Vehicle must be stopped.
ing the vehicle.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
Disabling/Enabling HSA
greater hill.
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be done
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elecvehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backtronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elecing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the 7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower
following steps:
switch bank below the climate controls) four times
within 20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two
seconds.
times.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
straight forward).
additional half-turn to the right.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
3. Apply the parking brake.
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In4. Start the engine.
dicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
5. Release the clutch pedal (if equipped).
is disabled.
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Towing With HSA
WARNING! (Continued)
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information
Placard
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
5
Tire And Loading Information Placard
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occugross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumpTire Inflation Pressures
tion.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
At least once a month:
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a auservice description (Load Index and Speed Code).
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
Tire Types
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
All Season Tires — If Equipped
the tire sidewall.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
tire inflation pressures.
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mode.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more inforpoorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mation.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
tire rotation pattern.
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
In Emergencies” for further information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipwheel equivalent in look and function to the original
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tire Spinning
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
• Install on front tires only.
• On a 225/65R16 100H use of a traction device that
meets the SAE type “Class S” specification is recommended.
• On a 225/65R17 102H, use of a snow traction device
with a maximum projection of 6 mm beyond the tire
profile is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
unequal rates.
reversed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
Tire Rotation
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure threshold for any reason, including low temperature
based on the cold inflation tire placard pressure require- effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
ments found on the tire placard label located on the
driver’s-side B-Pillar.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure
in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
to be turned off. The system will automatically update
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire placard
pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi
(207 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This
tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this situation, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this inforrecommended cold tire placard pressure value.
mation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in Warnings
the tire.
Base System
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will display
in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime
will be activated when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire placard pressure value
(located on the placard label on the driver’s-side B-Pillar).
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once
the updated tire pressures have been received.
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 • Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this inforthe wheels or wheel housings.
mation.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound Vehicles With Compact Spare
a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
• The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when
pressure in the compact spare tire.
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur with any of the following scenarios:
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
will sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
TPMS sensors.
displayed and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will turn on.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
• After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
Premium System — If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” Module.
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check
solid.
and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) for the TPMS to receive
this information.
The Premium TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four TPMS Sensors
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graphics
displaying tire pressures
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this inforThe “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illumimation.
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Message
pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
“LOW TIRE” message and a graphic display of the
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing. An ⬙Inflate
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
Tire to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSShould a low tire condition occur on any of the four TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, message is then followed by a graphic display, with - - in
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic place of the pressure value(s) indicating which TPMS
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure Sensor(s) is not being received.
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message. The
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
system will automatically update, the graphic display of
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the “Tire
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once
Light” will no longer flash, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received.
TPMS Low Pressure Warnings
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be message is then followed by a graphic display with
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
any of the following scenarios:
but they may not be in the correct vehicle position. The
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM SYSTEM” message exists.
TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
• The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
• Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
pressure in the compact spare tire.
the wheels or wheel housings.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on, the
The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
“LOW TIRE” message will be displayed, a chime will
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing
fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault
pressure value and the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message in
is present. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
the graphic display.
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
any of the four active road tires.
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
to receive this information.
in place of the pressure value.
General Information
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM following conditions:
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and • This device may not cause harmful interference.
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
• This device must accept any interference received,
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
including interference that may cause undesired opreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
eration.
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
ing licenses:
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
United States
MRXC4W4MA4
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiCanada
2546A-C4W4MA4
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
before considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
may be used in your vehicle.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- E-85 perform the following:
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher • Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
• Operate in a lean mode.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
MMT In Gasoline
• Poor engine performance.
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content Fuel System Cautions
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
CAUTION!
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
and California reformulated gasoline.
performance:
Materials Added To Fuel
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perforAll gasoline sold in the United States is required to
mance and damage the emissions control system.
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
fuel.
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
5
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
E-85 Badge
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat- • Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recomcompatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
mended.
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
• You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
Techron may be used.
refueling.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
• You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
least 5 miles (8 km).
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formuObserving these precautions will avoid possible hard lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
during warm up.
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
NOTE:
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With contains additional requirements, developed during exnon-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an
the above recommendations are followed, especially equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
5
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
Starting
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
CAUTION!
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the fuel door.
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
ADDING FUEL
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
turn on, due to fuel vapors escaping from the
system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
5
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
NOTE:
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understand• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic Sys- The label contains the following information:
tem” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- • Name of manufacturer
tion.
• Month and year of manufacture
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
dealer as soon as possible.
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
VEHICLE LOADING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label • Type of Vehicle
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
specified GVWR and GAWR.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
5
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rim Size
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles listed.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Inflation Pressure
rear GAWR.
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
Tire Size
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents added.
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
Overloading
Loading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
evenly over the front and rear axles.
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and and GAWRs.
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
5
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information
further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
and safely as possible.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
follow the requirements and recommendations in this ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
Common Towing Definitions
supported by the scale.
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
you in understanding the following information:
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
TRAILER TOWING
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- Frontal Area
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
information.
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
part of the load on your vehicle.
5
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. Weight Distribution hitched are recommended for loads in excess of
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
GCWR (Gross
Combined Weight
Rating)
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
Frontal Area
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 3,600 lbs
(1 633 kg)*
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
3 to 5 persons &
Luggage 3,350 lbs
(1 519 kg)*
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6 to 7 persons &
Luggage 3,000 lbs
(1 360 kg)*
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
3.6L/Automatic
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
Max. Tongue
Weight
360 lbs (163 kg)
335 lbs (152 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
by 100 lbs (45 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side Consider the following items when computing the
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of • The tongue weight of the trailer.
many trailer collisions.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
put in or on your vehicle.
your bumper or trailer hitch.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
5
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recomPerform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
mended.
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
5
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
spare tire.
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Tires
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
Four-Pin Connector
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a
lower gear range.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
5
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Cooling System
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
Highway Driving
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Reduce speed.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Air Conditioning
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
Turn off temporarily.
maximize fuel efficiency.
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
All Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
5
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — All Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .571 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut.
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .574
▫ Spare Tire Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Spare Tire Removal Instructions . . . . .
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
. . . . . .585
. . . . . .586
. . . . . .587
. . . . . .588
. . . . . .590
. . . . . .591
. . . . . .593
. . . . . .594
▫ Securing The Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . .601
6
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .612
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
6
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
TIREFIT Storage
The TIREFIT kit is stowed behind the rear left side trim
panel in the rear cargo area.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
6
TIREFIT Kit Location
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Turn the two rear left side trim panel latches to release
the trim panel.
TIREFIT Kit
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
TIREFIT Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on bottom
side of TIREFIT Kit)
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and
turn to this position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use
the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
selecting this mode.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT
kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
6
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
TIREFIT Expiration Date Location
• Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
use. Always replace these components immediately at
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement”.
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean • Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
WARNING!
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
discarded.
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
the TIREFIT kit.
TIREFIT kit.
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
–
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
–
If the tire has any damage from driving with
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose
extremely low tire pressure.
(7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
–
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
tire.
sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only in–
If the wheel has any damage.
tended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter
in the tread of your vehicle.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
(Continued)
6
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated
tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve
deflated tire.
stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground. This
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air
valve stem.
pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in
Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
4. Set the parking brake.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
On the TIREFIT kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
tire.
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
6
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
Sealant Hose (6):
pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as
70 psi (5 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual
tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrulatch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
ment panel.
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
6
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(E) After Driving:
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
opening.
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomvehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
stem.
12 Volt outlet.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
Gauge (3).
vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
service center.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posthe front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacehousing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
ment”.
bottle is locked into place.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
using the TIREFIT service kit.
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
vehicle.
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
of it accordingly.
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous- properly calibrated torque wrench.
ing.
6
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
19 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
6
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.
Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.
Jack And Tool Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located
under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by
means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire
drive” nut is located on the floor, under a plastic cap at
the front of the floor console or under front super console
forward bin liner.
6
Spare Tire Location
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut
To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the
spare tire, you will need to refer to one of the following
center console configurations.
Super Console
For vehicles equipped with the Super Console, the spare
tire winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the
console.
Super Console
1 — Lower Drawer
2 — Front Drawer
3 — Front Drawer Liner
1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor
console to gain clear access of the tire winch drive nut.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
2. Open the front drawer to expose the storage compart- Premium/Base/Cargo Center Console
ment.
Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug (if equipped) to
3. Remove the liner from the console’s storage compart- access the winch drive nut.
ment to access the spare tire winch drive nut.
6
Winch Cover Assembly Plug (If Equipped)
Drive Nut Access
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Tools
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be assembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
Winch T-handle; to raise/lower the compact spare tire/
cover assembly.
Assembled T-handle
A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
B — Extension 1
C — Extension 2
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
Spare Tire Removal Instructions
The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the
center console area.
6
Assembling The Spare Tire Hook
A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
B — Extension 1
C — Extension 2
Spare Tire And Cover
1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a T-handle and place
the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut.
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism
stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in
the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from
underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
3. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
Pulling Spare Tire
assemble the winch T-handle extensions to form a
NOTE: If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to
spare tire hook, and pull the spare tire out from under
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
the vehicle.
cover assembly from under the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
4. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright and remove the Preparations For Jacking
wheel spacer by squeezing the winch retaining tabs
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
together. Push the retainer through the spare tire to
slippery areas.
release it from the wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
Removing Wheel Spacer
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally Jacking Instructions
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
WARNING!
tire, block the left rear wheel.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
vehicle.
when the vehicle is being jacked.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that compact spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, compact spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of
“Tires – General Information” for information about the
compact spare tire, its use, and operation.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
6
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.
flange of the vehicle body.
Jack Locations
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
Rear Jacking Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597
6
Rear Jack Engaged
Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body
and is located 6 in (150 mm) from door edge.
Front Jack Locations
598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Front Jack Engaged
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
NOTE: In some situations the jack may need to be 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
placed on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle.
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until
Return the jack to its correct orientation once it is under
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
the vehicle.
obtained to install the compact spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
6
Mounting Compact Spare Tire
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Be sure to mount the compact spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if
the compact spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact 10. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
spare.
cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow
the deflated tire in the compact spare tire location.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon
8. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
as possible.
proper wheel lug nut torque.
11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to
form a “T” and fit the winch T-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the right until the winch
WARNING!
mechanism clicks at least three times.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire Tools” section for instructions on assembling the T-handle.
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire 12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools
repaired or replaced immediately.
back in the stowage compartment.
13. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601
Securing The Compact Spare Tire
CAUTION!
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a
T-handle and fit the winch T-handle over the drive The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mecha- winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
nism stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack power tools is not recommended and can damage the
in the cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out winch.
from under the vehicle.
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under
WARNING!
the vehicle.
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the compact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
provided.
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
down, and place the tire into the compact spare
tire/cover assembly. Slide the wheel spacer through
the center of the wheel and compact spare tire/cover
assembly, so that the two retainer tabs snap out and
engage the compact spare tire cover on the opposite
side.
6
602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
compact spare tire.
WARNING!
Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
have been properly extended through the center of
the wheel and compact spare tire/cover assembly.
Failure to properly engage both retainer tabs could
result in loss of the compact spare tire and cover
assembly, which will cause vehicle damage and may
cause loss of vehicle control and serious personal
injury.
4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned correctly against the underside of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed specifically to
stow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use
the winch to stow the full size deflated tire, or any
other full-size tire, as the tire may not be held
securely. Vehicle damage may result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
6
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
604 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the 6. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
proper wheel lug nut torque.
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
seated against the wheel.
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
lug nuts.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
handle counterclockwise.
precautions.
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper wheel lug nut torque.
CAUTION!
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
Positive Battery Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 607
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
and the fuel injection system.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged
WARNING!
battery.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
not use any other exposed metal parts.
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
battery.
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the Control System” in “Starting and Operating” for further
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
6
610 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
WARNING!
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
(Continued)
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 611
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
shift lever override access cover (located near the top
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
right of the shift lever in the instrument panel).
hole, and push and hold the override release lever
forward.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
6
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
612 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel lift
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Rear
Flatbed
Front
ALL
ALL MODELS
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 613
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, see ⬙Shift Lever Override⬙ in this section for
instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for
towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
6
614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed
equipment is not available, and the transmission is
operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front
wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel
lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .617
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .618
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .618
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . .650
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . .651
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
▫ Quad Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . .661
▫ Front Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
▫ Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp . . . . . . . .663
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .664
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Filter
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
For states that require an Inspection and MainteIf the problem persists, the message will appear the next
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
system is ready for testing.
MIL light off.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
of a normal bulb check.
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are services determined by the engineers who designed your
available which include detailed service information for vehicle.
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
Change Engine Oil
Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabe maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
tion.
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change infully warmed engine is shut OFF.
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain Engine Oil Selection
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the For best performance and maximum protection under all
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
engines.
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Checking Oil Level
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
This symbol means that the oil has Helix® or equivalent. is recommended for all operating
been certified by the American temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
Petroleum Institute (API). The starting and vehicle fuel economy.
manufacturer only recommends
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
API Certified engine oils.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomyour area.
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes Engine Oil Filter
are followed.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
Materials Added To Engine Oil
at every engine oil change.
Synthetic Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and filter and are recommended.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Engine Air Cleaner Filter
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
maintenance intervals.
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica- Maintenance-Free Battery
tions, should be obtained immediately.
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING! (Continued)
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start
of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- operating or personal injury may result.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to reservice facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
place the filter:
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
A/C Air Filter
lower the door.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
maintenance intervals.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Body Lubrication
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
attention should also be given to hood latching compo- Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
nents to ensure proper function. When performing other the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked at regular intervals.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt seconds to flush out any residual water.
from a dry windshield.
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid Cooling System
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR® All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) only by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
needed to be added to the system please contact your
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but local authorized dealer.
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
Selection Of Coolant
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti- “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioncoolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
your vehicle.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
engine cooling system.
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maindard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
the vehicle is operated.
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler NOTE:
Material Standard MS-12106.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concenneeded to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
7
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
a month.
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MSemergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground 12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
spills immediately.
overfill.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporThe radiator normally remains completely full, so there is ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
condenser clean.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emisbottle must also be protected against freezing.
sions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a system components should be inspected periodically.
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of maintenance intervals.
your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Rethe “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Mainfailure.
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives
to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
7
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid Level Check
Fluid And Filter Changes
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided. Your
authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level
using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid leakage or
transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked.
Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
CAUTION!
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, • For aluminum wheels, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner
(Part# 04796239AB) or equivalent.
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
Equipped
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non- Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
• For chrome wheels, use MOPAR® Chrome Cleaner • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
(Part#04318013) or equivalent.
7
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Cleaning Interior Trim
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equivastain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. lent, then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
clean vinyl upholstery.
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomprotectants on Stain Repel products.
mended for leather upholstery.
Interior Care
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
Instrument Panel Surfaces
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
use protectants or other products which may cause Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
restore the low glare surface.
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
WARNING!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial householdtype glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
Cleaning Headlights
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakequipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or
age than glass headlights.
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Removal
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
at one edge to ease removal.
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Cleaning
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
cloth.
with a clean soft cloth.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
Installation
WARNING! (Continued)
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the applicable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A
label that identifies each component may be printed or
embossed on the inside of the cover.
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Totally Integrated Power Module
• When installing the Totally Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do
so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the
following table.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
Cavity
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Natural
25 Amp Natural
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
J10
30 Amp Pink
—
J11
30 Amp Pink
—
J12
30 Amp Pink
Description
Power Folding Seat
Power Liftgate Module
Rear Door Module
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Antilock Brakes Pump/Stability Control System
Antilock Brakes Valve/Stability Control System
Power Memory Seat – If Equipped
Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle Motor/Flex
Fuel – If Equipped
Headlamp Wash/Manifold Tuning Valve – If
Equipped
Power Sliding Door Module/Anti–Theft Module – If Equipped
HVAC Rear Blower, Radiator Fan Motor
7
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J13
J14
J15
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
25 Amp Natural
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Natural
Description
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main
Rear Window Defogger
Front Blower
Starter Solenoid
Powertrain Control Module Trans Range
Radiator Fan
Front Wiper LO/HI
Front/Rear Washer
Sunroof Module
Rear Center Brake Lamp/Brake Switch
Front Fog Lamps
Front/Rear Axle Locker, Vacuum Pump Motor
Trailer Tow
Inverter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
Cavity
M6
Cartridge Fuse
—
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
M7
—
20 Amp Yellow
M8
M9
M10
—
—
—
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
M11
M12
M13
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
30 Amp Green
20 Amp Yellow
M14
—
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Power Outlet #1 (ACC), Rain Sensor, Cigar
Lighter (Instrument Panel or with Console Rear)
Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT) – Center Seat or with Console Rear
Front Heated Seat – If Equipped
Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped
Ignition Off Draw — Video System, Satellite
Radio, DVD, Hands-Free Module, Universal
Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp, Streaming
Video Module – If Equipped
Climate Control System
Amplifier/Radio
Instrument Cluster, SIREN, Clock Module,
Multi-Function Control Switch – If Equipped
Trailer Tow – If Equipped
7
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M15
Cartridge Fuse
—
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Natural
15 Amp Blue
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
—
—
—
—
—
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Natural
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Rear View Mirror, Instrument Cluster, MultiFunction Control Switch, Tire Pressure Monitor, Glow Plug Module – If Equipped
Airbag Module/Occupant Classification Module
Left Tail/License/Park Lamp, Running Lamps
Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
Powertrain
Instrument Cluster Interior Light, Switch
Bank, Steering Column Module, Switch Steering Wheel
Powertrain
Horn
Horn
Rear Wiper
Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
Cavity
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Power Mirror Switch, Driver Window Switch
Wireless Control Module, Keyless Entry Module
Powertrain, Transmission Control Module
Occupant Classification Module
Rear Wiper Module, Power Folding Mirror
Back-Up Lamps
Airbag Module, THATCHUM – If Equipped
Powertrain
Park Assist, Heater Climate Control Module,
Headlamp Wash, Compass, Rear Camera,
Door Lamps, Flashlight, Relay Diesel Cabin
Heater, Rad Fan Diesel – If Equipped
Heated Mirrors
Power Outlet #3 (Instrument Panel or with
Console Center)
7
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M37
Cartridge Fuse
—
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
M38
—
25 Amp Natural
Description
Antilock Brakes, Stability Control, Stop Lamp,
Fuel Pump
Door Lock/Unlock Motors, Liftgate Lock/
Unlock Motors
The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit • Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
breaker located in the Totally Integrated Power Module. • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
VEHICLE STORAGE
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of comYou may do the following:
pressor damage when the system is started again.
• Remove the 60 Amp cartridge in the Totally Integrated
Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw
(IOD).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Center & Rear Dome
Lamp
Center & Rear Reading
Lamps
Front Door Courtesy
Lamp
Front Header Reading
Lamps – If Equipped
Instrument Cluster
Lamps
Liftgate Lamp(s)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Bulb Number
578
578
578
578
PC74
578
PC579
Removable Console
Lamp – If Equipped
Visor Vanity Lamps
Bulb Number
194
6501966
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamp – (Low and
High Beam Halogen)
Headlamp (HID – If
Equipped) Low Beam
Fog Lamp – If Equipped
Front Side Marker
Front Park/Turn Signal
Bulb Number
H11
D1S
H11
W5W
PY27/7W or 3757A
7
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
Rear Tail, Stop, and Side
Marker Lamp
Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
Backup Lamp
License
Bulb Number
3757A
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
3157
168
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10
seconds, as the system charges.
Quad Headlamps
1. Raise the hood to access the high or low beam bulbs at
the rear of the headlamp housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb.
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps
2. Release the two tabs on the side of the connector and 1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
remove the connector from the bulb.
housing.
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the 2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlamp housing.
headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked 3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
into the headlamp housing.
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing.
7
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Side Marker Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of the
housing.
fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the push
pin and lower the hinged access door on the air dam.
NOTE: Access is somewhat limited. You may have to
remove the inner fender well or remove the headlamp 1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
the air dam, twist the bulb counterclockwise, and
housing for bulb replacement.
remove bulb.
2. Twist the socket and remove from the headlamp
housing, then pull the bulb out.
CAUTION!
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
2. Disconnect wire harness from the bulb.
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise.
Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or
similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side
to disengage the two ball studs.
Tail Lamp Mounting Screws
NOTE:
• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
• The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
dislodging them separately.
7
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Twist the socket and remove it from the lamp assem- License Lamp
bly.
The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light
bar and above the license plate.
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the 1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and
lamp assembly.
pull down on the lamp assembly for removal.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
and pull the bulb out to remove.
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into
place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
20 Gallons
76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certi6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
fied).
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/
13.4 Quarts
12.6 Liters
Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard
MS-12106.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear
heater.
7
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and
Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
87 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use Only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission. We recommend
MOPAR® ATF+4® Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid
+4, MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
670 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inremind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
formation.
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serwhichever comes first.
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Severe Duty All Models
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Check engine oil level.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check windshield washer fluid level.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 671 M
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights .
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
672 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
8
Maintenance Chart
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning
filter.
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L engine). **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 673 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
M 674 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 675 M
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .679
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .683
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .680
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .680
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .684
9
678 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 679
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
680 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 247–9753
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 681
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
682 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 683
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdministraREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other inforIn The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
mation about motor vehicle safety from http://
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS
9
684 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 685
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
9
686 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
688 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .625
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control. . . . . . . . . .443
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .451
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
INDEX 689
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .29
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Light . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Interlock .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration, Compass . . . . . .
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Carbon Monoxide Warning . .
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . .
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . .
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . .
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.640
.641
.491
.330
.476
.660
.128
.351
.257
.665
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.549
.490
.638
.124
.301
.301
.304
.293
10
690 INDEX
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .326
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.523
.350
.351
.351
.348
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.387
.387
.346
.294
.294
.260
.299
.681
.638
.634
.636
.665
.635
INDEX 691
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Disarming, Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .346
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . . .394
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
10
692 INDEX
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . .
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .243
. . . . .498
. . . . .335
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.571
.585
.605
.571
.619
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.625
.473
.123
.623
.617
.617
.635
.634
.124
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
INDEX 693
FCC General Information (Sentry
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . .
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . .
Key) . . . . . . . . . . .18 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) Seating . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
. . . . . . . . . . .294
. . . . . . . . . . .665
. . . . . . . . . . .128
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.644
.641
.635
.490
.666
.229
.662
.201
.609
.540
.549
.543
.541
.346
.476
10
694 INDEX
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . .
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . .
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.541
.328
.328
.540
.328
.332
.543
.541
.540
.540
.346
.665
.545
.549
.346
.346
.651
.264
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override . . .
General Information . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.549
.541
.540
.346
.541
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.332
.328
.328
.321
.478
.610
.182
.649
.552
.551
.551
.151
INDEX 695
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . .
. . .488
. . .571
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.649
.228
.233
.227
.227
.197
.140
.443
.473
.232
.502
. . .557
. . .264
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Hook, Coat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
10
696 INDEX
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .501
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
INDEX 697
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .326
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .326
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .321
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
10
698 INDEX
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .326
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
INDEX 699
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .513
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .277
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
10
700 INDEX
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .638
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .441
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Removable Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
INDEX 701
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .72
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . . .326
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
10
702 INDEX
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .441
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Storage Bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .81
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .451
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .512
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
INDEX 703
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.517
.528
.585
.523
.517
.520
.518
.585
.526
.512
.531
.325
.685
.520
.527
.530
.506
.507
.521
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
Torque Converter Clutch . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . .
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control Switch . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.587
.525
.562
.525
.506
.559
.486
.554
.165
.612
.558
.567
.558
.165
.487
.496
.496
.502
.554
10
704 INDEX
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .29
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .264
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode . . . .
Operating Instructions CD Mode . . . . . . . .
Operating Instructions Radio Mode . . . . . .
Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect® 130 With Satellite Radio
Multimedia Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . .
Umbrella Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.169
.153
.161
.164
. . . .170
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.369
.364
.361
.367
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.382
.378
.151
.289
.685
.387
INDEX 705
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Voice Command
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .321
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Zone Control (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .443
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s
electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals.
Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed
properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed
during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative
power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to
the negative battery connection. This connection should not be
fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the
rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas
with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation
of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away
from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded
coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low
Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic
systems.
2014 300
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14Y531-126-AC
14C482-126-AA
Third
Edition
First Edition
Printed
Printedin
in U.S.A.
U.S.A.
300
Download PDF

advertising